Menu

Acts 20:9 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

BSAsittingkathēmai thende a certaintis young manneanias [young, under forty years old] namedonoma EutychusEutuchos byepi theho window,thuris overpoweredkatapherō [overcome, weighed down] by sleephupnos deepbathus [profound, far down] as is talkingdialegō [preached, discoursed] <the>ho PaulPaulos onepi longer,polus having been overpoweredkatapherō [completely, thoroughly] byapo theho sleephupnos he fellpiptō [collapsed, tumbled down] fromapo theho third storytristegos [the top level, the highest floor] downkatō andkai was picked upairō [taken away, lifted] dead.nekros [lifeless, without breath]

Word
Listen & take awayActs 20
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 9 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (nekros) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 20:9quick helps
In a sentenceEutychus fell from a window while Paul preached, after being overcome by sleep.
Who is speakingThe narrator recounts an event during Paul's preaching.
Where we areThis event takes place in an upper room where many gathered.
The hard wordΕὔτυχος
Take awayBeing overcome by sleep can lead to serious consequences.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectκαθέζομαι verbκαθέζομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

2 of 29 occur nowhere else in the New Testament — words chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 20:9

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Eutychus Falls from a Windowgenerated

8Now there were many lamps in the upper room where we were gathered.
9And a certain young man named Eutychus, seated in the window, was sinking into a deep sleep as Paul talked on and on. When he was sound asleep, he fell from the third story and was picked up dead.
10But Paul went down, threw himself on the young man, and embraced him. “Do not be alarmed!” he said. “He is still alive!”
11Then Paul went back upstairs, broke bread, and ate. And after speaking until daybreak, he departed.

Acts 20:9 describes a young man named Eutychus who fell asleep during Paul's lengthy sermon. Seated in a window, he succumbed to deep sleep and fell from the third story, resulting in his death. This incident highlights the dangers of neglecting one's alertness during important teachings and the miraculous nature of Paul's subsequent actions, as he revived Eutychus in the following verses.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Jonah 1:5–6The sailors were afraid, and each cried out to his own god. And they threw the ship’s cargo into the sea to lighten the load. But Jonah had gone down to the lowest part of the vessel, where he lay down and fell into a deep sleep.
2Matthew 26:40–41Then Jesus returned to the disciples and found them sleeping. “Were you not able to keep watch with Me for one hour?” He asked Peter.
3Mark 13:36Otherwise, he may arrive without notice and find you sleeping.
41 Kings 17:19But Elijah said to her, “Give me your son.” So he took him from her arms, carried him to the upper room where he was staying, and laid him on his own bed.
5Acts 14:19Then some Jews arrived from Antioch and Iconium and won over the crowds. They stoned Paul and dragged him outside the city, presuming he was dead.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 6 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

the third1 Kings 17:19

The Key Word Εὔτυχος, Eutuchosgenerated

The Greek word Εὔτυχος (i.e., *Eutuchos*) is a proper name meaning 'fortunate.' It refers to a young man mentioned in Acts 20:9 who experienced a life-threatening fall.

This name is derived from roots that imply well-being or good fortune, which stands in contrast to the unfortunate event that unfolds in the narrative.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is presented in the Berean Standard Bible (BSB), which uses the term young man to describe Eutychus. The KJV and ASV also reflect this meaning.

Where translations differ, the BSB uses having been overpowered (DBY), while others like WEB use weighed down, and BBE uses overcome. This indicates varying interpretations of the same Greek term.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb in the verse is ἔπεσεν, he fell, which governs several phrases: a participial phrase describing the subject's state, a prepositional phrase indicating where he was, and additional clauses providing context.

The structure includes a noun phrase for the subject Εὔτυχος and various clauses that elaborate on the actions and conditions surrounding his fall.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

νεανίας (young man) appears in the Septuagint, translating the Hebrew אִישׁ (man) in contexts that describe youth, similar to its use in Acts 20:9.

The term ὕπνος (sleep) also has roots in the Septuagint, translating Hebrew words for sleep or slumber, showing a consistent theme of sleep in biblical narratives.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 20:9 tells of a young man named Eutychus who fell asleep while Paul was preaching and fell from a window, resulting in his death. Paul later revived him, demonstrating the power of faith and the importance of staying alert during teachings.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What happened to Eutychus?

Eutychus fell from a window while asleep during Paul's preaching and was picked up dead.

Why was Eutychus sitting in the window?

He was likely trying to find a comfortable spot to listen to Paul's lengthy sermon.

What does Eutychus' name mean?

The name Eutychus means 'fortunate' or 'well-favored,' which is ironic given the circumstances of his fall.

What lesson can we learn from Eutychus' story?

This story serves as a reminder to remain attentive and alert during important teachings and discussions.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I ensure I remain attentive during teachings or sermons?
  2. What distractions do I face that might lead me to 'fall asleep' spiritually?
  3. In what ways can I help others stay engaged during discussions about faith?
  4. What does Eutychus' experience teach us about the importance of community support in times of crisis?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers comment on the incident of Eutychus, reflecting on the dangers of spiritual neglect and the miraculous revival by Paul.

TertullianOn Modesty c. 155–220
And so, if it were agreed that even the blessed apostles had granted any such indulgence (to any crime) the pardon of which (comes) from God, not from man, it would be competent (for them) to have done so,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 20 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 43 c. 347–407
"And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell down from the third loft,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 20 →
AratorON THE ACTS OF THE APOSTLES 2 6th c.
Eutychus, alone, banished from the wakeful ones keeping watch, entrusted to a window with limbs sunk in heavy sleep. O rest wrongly won! O hearts always given over to sleep, unprotected by good! How great the disasters he lies open to,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 20 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 20:9 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And there sat in a window a certain young man,.... In the upper room, where he placed himself, either for air and refreshment, the chamber being suffocating, through the number of people, and of

Read John Gill on Acts 20 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell down from the third loft, and was taken up dead.

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 20 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Preaching; discoursing and arguing; for it does not seem to have been a continued speech, by the word here used. Fell down from the third loft; this fall is thought by some to have been caused by Satan, (through God’ s permission), that he might the more disturb Paul, and hinder, or put an end to, his sermon; which by the ensuing miracle God turned to a quite contrary effect.

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 20 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

9 And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell down from the third loft, and was taken up dead. Ver. 9. Being fallen into a deep sleep] Woe to many today, when God shall once send out summonses for sleepers.

Read John Trapp on Acts 20 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(9) There sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus . . .—The name, like those of kindred meaning, such as Felix, Felicia, Felicissimus, Syntyche, Epaphroditus, Fortunatus, Faustus, Felicitas, was sufficiently common, especially among the freed-man class. In one instance, in an inscription in the Collegio Romano, the two names of Eutychus and Felicia appear as belonging to husband and wife. And was taken up dead.—What follows is obviously related as a miraculous resuscitation; but it may be questioned, looking to St. Paul’s words, “his life is in him,” whether more than apparent death is meant. He was to all appearance dead—would have died but for the prayer of the Apostle; but…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 20 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 9. There sat in a window] This was probably an opening in the wall, to let in light and air, for there was no glazing at that time; and it is likely that Eutychus fell backward through it, down to the ground, on the outside; there being nothing to prevent his falling out, when he had once lost the power to take care of himself, by getting into a deep sleep.

Read AdamClarke on Acts 20 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

9. And there sat in a [better, the] window] The window in that climate was only an opening in the wall, and not as in our country provided with a framework, the bars of which would have prevented the accident which is here described.a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep] The last verb signifies borne down, overpowered, and the Rev. Ver. gives “borne down with deep sleep.” He was not a careless hearer, but sleep at the late hour overcame his youthful frame and he could resist it no longer.and as Paul was long preaching] Better, “and as Paul discoursed yet longer” with Rev. Ver. The comparative degree refers to the expectation or the wearied powers of the young…

Read Cambridge on Acts 20 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And there sat in a window - The window was left open, probably to avoid the malice of their enemies, who might be disposed otherwise to charge them with holding their assemblies in darkness for purposes of iniquity.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 20 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

And a certain young man named Eutychus, seated in the window, was sinking into a deep sleep as Paul talked on and on. When he was sound asleep, he fell from the third story and was picked up dead.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

A certain young man named Eutychus sat in the window, weighed down with deep sleep. As Paul spoke still longer, being weighed down by his sleep, he fell down from the third floor and was taken up dead.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

And a certain young man named Eutychus, seated in the window, was sinking into a deep sleep as Paul talked on and on. When he was sound asleep, he fell from the third story and was picked up dead.

NETBNew English Translation2006

A young man named Eutychus, who was sitting in the window, was sinking into a deep sleep while Paul continued to speak for a long time. Fast asleep, he fell down from the third story and was picked up dead.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell down from the third loft, and was taken up dead.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And there sat in the window a certain young man named Eutychus, borne down with deep sleep; and as Paul discoursed yet longer, being borne down by his sleep he fell down from the third story, and was taken up dead.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And there sat in the window a certain young man named Eutychus, borne down with deep sleep; and as Paul discoursed yet longer, being borne down by his sleep he fell down from the third story, and was taken up dead.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, having fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell from the third loft, and was taken up dead.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And there sate in a windowe a certaine yong man, named Eutychus, fallen into a dead sleepe: and as Paul was long preaching, hee ouercome with sleepe, fell downe from the thirde loft, and was taken vp dead.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And a certain youth, by name Eutychus, sitting at the window-opening, overpowered by deep sleep, while Paul discoursed very much at length, having been overpowered by the sleep, fell from the third story down to the bottom, and was taken up dead.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and there was sitting a certain youth, by name Eutychus, upon the window — being borne down by a deep sleep, Paul discoursing long — he having sunk down from the sleep, fell down from the third story, and was lifted up dead.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and there a certain youth was sitting, by name Eutychus, on the window—being borne down by a deep sleep, Paul discoursing long—he having sunk down from the sleep, fell down from the third story, and was lifted up dead.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

In the window was sitting a young man named Eutychus, who fell into a deep sleep. As Paul spoke even longer, this young man, still sleeping, fell down from the third story and was picked up dead.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And a certain young man named Eutychus, sitting on the window, being oppressed with a deep sleep, (as Paul was long preaching,) by occasion of his sleep fell from the third loft down, and was taken up dead.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

A young man called Eutychus was sitting in the window, and he began feeling very sleepy. As Paul went on speaking he fell sound asleep and tumbled down from the third story. When they picked him up they found he was dead.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And a certain young man named Eutychus, who was seated in the window, went into a deep sleep; and while Paul went on talking, being overcome by sleep, he had a fall from the third floor, and was taken up dead.

Word by word, the decisions they made

νεανίαςneanias young man G3494 2 different renderings
young manASV BBE BSB DRA KJV MSB NWB RVA WEB
a young manFBV NETB ULB
ὀνόματιonoma named G3686 2 different renderings
namedASV BBE BSB DRA GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
nameDBY LSV YLT
καταφερόμενοςkatapherō overpowered G2702 3 different renderings
having been overpoweredDBY
weighed downWEB
overcomeBBE
ὕπνῳhupnos by sleep G5258 2 different renderings
sleepASV BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
by sleepBBE
διαλεγομένουdialegō as is talking G1256 2 different renderings
discoursedASV DBY RVA
talkingBBE
ἔπεσενpiptō he fell G4098 6 different renderings
fell downASV KJV LSV NETB RVA ULB WEB YLT
fellDBY DRA
he fellBSB MSB
having fallenNWB
fallenGNV
tumbled downFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδέthenclauseclausenoun phrase · subjectnoun phraseτιςa certainνεανίαςyoung manadjective phraseclauseadverbialὀνόματιnamedpredicateΕὔτυχοςEutychusclause · adverbialverbκαθεζόμενοςWas sittingprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶbynoun phraseτῆςtheθυρίδοςwindowclause · adverbialclauseverbκαταφερόμενοςoverpowerednoun phrase · adverbialὕπνῳby sleepβαθεῖdeepclauseverbδιαλεγομένουas talkednoun phrase · subjectτοῦ-ΠαύλουPaulprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶonπλεῖονlongerclause · adverbialverbκατενεχθεὶςhaving been overpoweredprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸbynoun phraseτοῦtheὕπνουsleepverbἔπεσενhe fellprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸfromnoun phraseτοῦtheτριστέγουthird storyadverbialκάτωdownκαὶandclauseverbἤρθηwas picked upadverbialνεκρόςdead

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Sedens autem quidam adolescens nomine Eutychus super fenestram, cum mergeretur somno gravi, disputante diu Paulo, ductus somno cecidit de tertio cœnaculo deorsum, et sublatus est mortuus.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܝܬܒ ܗܘܐ ܥܠܝܡܐ ܚܕ ܕܫܡܗ ܗܘܐ ܐܘܛܟܘܣ ܒܟܘܬܐ ܘܫܡܥ ܘܛܒܥ ܒܫܢܬܐ ܝܩܝܪܬܐ ܟܕ ܐܓܪ ܗܘܐ ܒܡܠܬܐ ܦܘܠܘܣ ܘܒܫܢܬܗ ܢܦܠ ܗܘܐ ܡܢ ܬܠܬܐ ܡܕܝܪܝܢ ܘܐܫܬܩܠ ܟܕ ܡܝܬ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καθεζόμενος δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

δέ τις νεανίας ὀνόματι Εὔτυχος ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, διαλεγομένου τοῦ Παύλου ἐπὶ πλεῖον, κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἔπεσεν ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
καθεζόμενος sittingNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 20:9καθέζομαιsittingsittingκαθέζομαιδέthenthenδέτὶςa certaina certainτὶςνεανίαςyoung manyoung manνεανίαςὄνομαnamednamedὄνομαΕὔτυχοςEutychusEutychusΕὔτυχοςἐπίbybyἐπίthetheθυρίςwindow,window,θυρίςκαταφέρωoverpoweredoverpoweredκαταφέρωὕπνοςby sleepby sleepὕπνοςβαθύςdeepdeepβαθύςδιαλέγομαιas is talkias is talkingδιαλέγομαι<the><the>ΠαῦλοςPaulPaulΠαῦλοςἐπίononἐπίπλειονlonger,longer,πλειονκαταφέρωhaving beenhaving been oveκαταφέρωἀπόbybyἀπόthetheὕπνοςsleepsleepὕπνοςπίπτωhe fellhe fellπίπτωἀπόfromfromἀπόthetheτρίστεγονthird storythird storyτρίστεγονκάτωdowndownκάτωκαίandandκαίαἴρωwas picked was picked upαἴρωνεκρόςdead.dead.νεκρόςκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάεὖAdv well, Adv well, well εὖθύραn.f. a doon.f. a door, opθύραὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόδιάPrep. throPrep. through, διάνέοςAdj young,Adj young, new,νέοςγινώσκωv. I come v. I come to knγινώσκωὀνίνημιv. I help,v. I help, profὀνίνημιβάσιςn.f. the fn.f. the footβάσιςπαύωv. I causev. I cause to cπαύωπολύςAdj much, Adj much, many,πολύςπέτομαιv. I flyv. I flyπέτομαιστέγηn.f. a flan.f. a flat rooστέγηκάθημαιv. I sit, v. I sit, am seκάθημαιθρόνοςn.m. a thrn.m. a throne, θρόνοςὕπνοςn.m. sleepn.m. sleepὕπνοςἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίκαταφέρωv. I bringv. I bring downκαταφέρω
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 20:9

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
καθεζόμενοςkathēmai sitting G2516 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To sit down is the meaning of this word, used in scenes like Jesus sitting with the disciples in Luke 2:46 and John 20:12.
Tyndale gloss
to sit down
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καθέζομαι (i.e., *kathezomai*) means to sit down or take one's seat. It appears in various contexts, including sitting as a suppliant or in a teaching role. The New Testament references include Matthew 26:55, Luke 2:46, and John 20:12, among others. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καθ-έζομαι,

[in LXX: Le 12:5, al. (ישׁב), Jb 39:28 (שׁכן);]

to sit down, sit: Jo 20:12; seq. ἐν, Mt 26:55, Lk 2:46, Jo 11:20, Ac 6:15; seq. ἐπί, c. gen., Ac 20:9; id. c. dat., Jo 4:6 (cf. παρα-καθέζ-, κάθημαι).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθ-έζομαι ; impf. ἐκαθεζόμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to sit down, seat one’s self, sit: Jn. xx. 12; foll. by ἐν with dat. of place, Mt. xxvi. 55; Lk. ii. 46; Jn. xi. 20; Acts vi. 15; foll. by ἐπί with gen., Acts xx. 9 L T Tr WH; by ἐπί with dat., Jn. iv. 6; ἐκεῖ, Jn. vi. 3 Tdf.; [od where, Acts ii. 2 Lehm. Cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 336 sq.; B. 56 (49) ; 60 (52). Comp.: παρα-καθέζομαι. |

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καθέζομαι. For this verb, which is always purely durative in the NT “sit,” not ‘sit down” (Pro/eg. p. 118), we may cite Sy// 7375 (c. A.D. 175) ἐὰν δὲ ἱερὸς παῖς ἐξωτικὸς καθεσθεὶς ἀναλώσῃ τὰ πρὸς τοὺς θεοὺς καὶ τὸ Βακχεῖον, ἔστω μετὰ τοῦ πατρὸς ἰόβακχος ἐπὶ μιᾷ σπονδῇ τοῦ πατρός. In the v/a.pD. Acts of the martyr Paphnutius we read—’Atra 11απνούτιος δὲ ἐκαθέσθη ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἐκ[αθέσθησαν δὲ adjral παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ (PSI I. 2651): cf. the Silco rescript OGTS 20138 (vi/A.D.) οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεζόμενοι (for καθεἵομένους) εἰς χώραν αὐτῶν, 29 οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν. Vett. Val. p. 7823 ποιοῦσι γὰρ ἄρχοντας πόλεων καὶ ἐπὶ δικαστηρίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθέζομαι (kathezomai) — to sit down.

καθέζομαι

(see. below), imperfect ἐκαθεζόμην in Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but frequently as aorist 2, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in Poets, καθεζόμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future καθεδοῦμαι [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist καθεσθείς [Refs 2nd c.AD+], which supplies the transitive sense, is more common in present and imperfect, but we have κατ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἕζεαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—sit down, take one's seat, ἀγορήνδε καθεζώμεσθα κιόντες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἕζευ ἐπὶ θρόνου[Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθεζομένη πρόχνυ (see. πρόχνυ); so κ. ἐν.. εὐνατηρίοις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; preside, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ λαχόντες προεδρεύειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς καθεζόμενοι taking their seats, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθέζομαι

kathezomai

from 2596 and the base of 1476; to sit down:--sit.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 1476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθέζομαι

v.

I am sitting, sit, am seated

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθέζομαι kathezomai 7x

to seat one’s self, sit down, Mt. 26:55; Lk. 2:46; Jn. 4:6; 1:20; 20:12; Acts 6:15; 20:9*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθέζομαι Dep.:— to sit down, take one's seat, Hom., Trag.

to sit as suppliants, Eur., Thuc.

to sit down in a country, encamp, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-NSM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sit'-ing (yashabh, "to sit down or still," daghar, "to brood," "hatch"; kathezomai, "to sit down," anakeimai, "to lie back," "recline"): The favorite position of the Orientals (Mal 3:3; Mt 9:9; 26:55 (compare Mt 5:1; Lu 4:20; 5:3); Mr 14:18; Lu 18:35; Joh 2:14, etc.).

"In Palestine people sit at all kinds of work; the carpenter saws, planes, and hews with his hand-adze, sitting upon the ground or upon the plank he is planing. The washerwoman sits by the tub, and, in a word, no one stands where it is possible to sit.…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Sitting

The attitude generally assumed in Palestine by those who were engaged in any kind of work. “The carpenter saws, planes, and hews with his hand-adze, sitting on the ground or upon the plank he is planning. The washerwoman sits by the tub; and, in a word, no one stands when it is possible to sit. Shopkeepers always sit, and Levi sitting at the receipt of custom (Matt. 9:9) is the exact way to state the case.”, Thomson, Land and Book.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%sitting
sitting86% · 6×i was sitting14% · 1×

7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἱερόςa temple
Article the
ὁδοιπορίαa journey, travel
Article the
οἶκοςa house, household
Article the
λευκόςwhite, bright
ἐν
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole,
καθέζομαιsitting
what comes after →
ἐν
μέσοςmiddle, in the mArticle the
διδάσκωI teach
καίand, even, also,
οὕτωthus, so, in this ma
ἐπί
εἷςone
πρός
δέbut, on the other ha
τὶς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθέζομαι · 7× in the New Testament
John Acts Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Giants 48c. AD 40

χρῆται γὰρ οὗτος ταῖς εἰρηνικωτάταις σχέσεσιν ἢ ὡς ἑστὼς ἢ ὡς καθεζόμενος, ἥκιστα τρέπεσθαι καὶ μεταβολαῖς χρῆσθαι πεφυκώς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.196c. AD 75–95

Ταῦτα τοῦ θεοῦ κρίναντος περὶ τῶν Σοδομιτῶν Ἅβραμος θεασάμενος τρεῖς ἀγγέλους, ἐκαθέζετο δὲ πρὸς τῇ δρυῒ τῇ Μαμβρῆ παρὰ τῇ θύρᾳ τῆς αὑτοῦ αὐλῆς, καὶ νομίσας εἶναι ξένους ἀναστὰς ἠσπάσατό τε καὶ παρʼ αὐτῷ καταχθέντας παρεκάλει ξενίας μεταλαβεῖν.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.2.4c. AD 140

ἡ δὲ πάλιν ἐπελάβετό μου τῆς χειρὸς καὶ ἐγείρει με καὶ καθίζει ἐπὶ τὸ συμψέλιον ἐξ εὐωνύμων: ἐκαθέζετο δὲ καὶ αὐτὴ ἐκ δεξιῶν.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
δέde then G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέthen2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τιςtis a certain G5100 Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing in a general sense, as seen in Luke 9:49 and John 11:1. It can mean someone, anyone, or anything. This term is often used to describe an unspecified individual or object.
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τὶς is an enclitic indefinite pronoun meaning 'someone' or 'something.' It can refer to a certain person or object and appears in both singular and plural forms, such as τινός and τινες. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Luke 9:49 and Acts 5:25. It is related to the interrogative pronoun τίς, indicating its flexible use in questions and statements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τις, neut., τι, gen., τινός,

enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε.

As subst.,

one, a certain one: Lk 9:49, Jo 11:1, Ac 5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Lk 13:1, Ac 15:1, Ro 3:8, al.

someone, anyone, something, anything: Mt 12:29, Mk 9:30, Lk 8:46, Jo 2:25, Ac 17:25, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironical answers, unless…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τις (indef. pron.), ‘* someone, something’’: P Vat ΑἸ (B.c. 168) (= UPZi. p. 303) πᾶς τις πειρᾶται. . ., P Lond 421° (B.C. 168) (= Selections, p. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ, τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,’’ P Oxy IV. 7421° (B.c. 2) ἐάν τι δύνῃ... δὸς ἐργασίαν, “if you can, give your attention to it’’ (Edd.), 2d. I. 120% (iv/a.D.) τινα ὁρῶντα αἱαυτὸν (/. ἑαυτὸν) ἐν δυστυχίᾳ, ““α man finding himself in adversity,’ 13 ἀποστῖλόν pot τινα ἢ Γοῦνθον ἢ ᾿Αμμώνιον, “send someone to me, either Gunthus or Ammonius” (Edd.). P Oxy VI. 937°" (ili/A.D.) γ]ράψον ἐκεῖ TO kat’ εἶδος ὅτι τι kal τι εἴληφας is translated by the editors ‘* write the list there, that you have received so and so.” They 3) ες remark that it is simpler to take τι καί τι as analogous to τὸ καὶ τό than ‘‘to take τί kal τί as an indirect interrogative, ὅτι being…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τις (tis) — one.

τις,

τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with ?? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo)

__A Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τὶς

tis

an enclitic indefinite pronoun; some or any person or object:--a (kind

of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he

(every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, -

thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith,

whom(-soever), whose(-soever).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τις, τι

Indef.pr.

any one, some one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τις tis 534x

enclitic, indefinite pronoun, a certain one, someone, Mt. 12:47; pl. some, certain, several, Lk. 8:2; Acts 9:19; 2 Pet. 3:16; one, a person, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 14:8; Jn. 6:50; combined with the name of an individual, one, Mk. 15:21; as it were in a manner, a kind of, Heb. 10:27; Jas. 1:18; any whatever, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Indef-NSM — Indefinite pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

X-NSM Part of Speech: indefinite pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%anyone
anyone27% · 144×some19% · 102×certain17% · 93×anything9% · 48×any9% · 47×one6% · 34×someone4% · 19×something3% · 18×other renderings7% · 37×

542 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject66%object20%adverbial9%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 530 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰCond
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὅτιthat, since, bec
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰCondεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCond
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἐγώ
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sἐάνCondβλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςΦαρισαῖοςa Phariseeὁδόςa way, road, jou
τὶςa certain529×
what comes after →
Article the
γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cμαθητήςa learner, disciἀπό
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπλανάωI lead astray, dἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αὐτός
ἐκὁράωI see, look uponἀπό
ἐκ
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐνπλούσιοςrichὑδρωπικόςafflicted with d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτὶς · 529× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy Romans James Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν· μὴ ἐξέστω δὲ τῷ καθόλου ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10364 descr.Pathyris126 BC–102 BC

προγεγραμμένου ἵππου, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαί σοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθωμεν ἢ ἄλλος τις ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἥ τʼ ἔφοδος ἄκυρος ἔσται καὶ προσαποτείσομέν σοι χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε.

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

σημαινομένης ἀρούρης μιᾶς , καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσασθαι Νεχθανοῦπιν καὶ τοὺς τούτου υἱοὺς μηδʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τὸν Πετεαρσεμθεία μηδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
νεανίαςneanias young man G3494 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
3× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A young man, typically under forty years old, is described by this word in Acts 7:58 and 20:9. It refers to a youth or young adult.
Amplified meaning
young, under forty years old
Tyndale gloss
young man
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word νεανίας (lemma: neanias) means 'young man' or 'youth,' typically referring to males in their prime, roughly between twenty-four and forty years old. It is derived from a root meaning 'youth' and is used in the New Testament in Acts 7:58, 20:9, and 23:17, 18. The lexicons note that it can also imply youthful characteristics, both positive and negative.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νεανίας, -ου, ὁ

(< νεάν = νέος),

[in LXX for נַעַר, בָּחוּר;]

a young man: Ac 7:58 20:9 23:17, 18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νεανίας, -ov, 6, (fr. vedv, and this fr. véos; cf. μεγιστάν [q- v-], ξυνάν), fr. Hom. down; Hebr. 3y1) and 73n3; a young man: Acts xx. 9; xxiii. 17, and RG in 18 [so here WH tzxt.], 22; it is used asin Grk. writ., like the Lat. adulescens and the Hebr. Ἢ} (Gen. xli. 12), of men between twenty-four and forty years of age [οἵ. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 213; Diog. Laért. 8,10; other reff. in Steph. Thesaur. 8. VV. νεᾶνις, νεανίσκος]: Acts vii. 58.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

νεανίας is restored in P Oxy IIT. 4714 (ii/a.p.) with reference to a boy of seventeen who had not been sent—émt ra] διδαokad¢tja κα[ὶ] τ[ὰς προ]σηκούσας τοῖς ν[ εανί]α[ις] τριβ[ά!ς, “εἴο the schools and the exercises proper for the young ”’ (Edd.): cf. νὴ 425 (=*%546B)?> (p.c. 216-14) εἰς τὸ ἔλαιον τοῖς veaviors (/. -αις) στατῆρας δέκα. For νεανιevopat of acting with youthful recklessness see P Grenf II. 78° (A.D. 307). The word is derived from a hypothetical abstract noun *veFa, ‘‘ youth” (Boisacq, p. 659). veaviaxoc. In P Amh II. 39? (late ii/B.c.) the members of a chosen band of youths are described as—ot [ἐκ] τοῦ σημείου veaνίσκοι. Cf. also for the word P Par 60 dys! (c. B.c. 200) ὥστίε φυλάττειν καὶ καταστῆσαι] τοὺς νεανίσκους, P Oxy III. 53328 (ii/iii A.D.) where directions are given not to lease a house—veaviokots ἵϊν]α μὴ ἔχωμεν στομάχους9] μηδὲ φθόνον, ‘‘to youths that we may…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νεανίας (neanias) — young man.

νεᾱν-ίας, ου,

Epic dialect and Ionic dialect νεηνίης, εω, ὁ, dative plural νεανίοις [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: (νεάν):—young man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a substantive in [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. frequently with the sense of a youth in character, i.e. either in good sense, impetuous, active, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or in bad sense, hot-headed, wilful, headstrong, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. as masculine adjective, youthful, νεανίαι τὰς ὄψεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. of things, etc., new, young, fresh, νεανίαις ὤμοισι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ν. λόγοι rash, wilful words, [Refs 5th c.BC+] is trisyllable in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare νεανικός.]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

νεανίας

neanias

from a derivative of 3501; a youth (up to about forty years):--young

man.

see GREEK for 3501

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νεανίας, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a young man, youth

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νεανίας neanias 3x

a young man, youth, Acts 20:9; 23:17; used of one who is in the prime of life, Acts 7:58*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

See ANTHROPOLOGY.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Man

(1.) Heb. ‘Adam, used as the proper name of the first man. The name is derived from a word meaning “to be red,” and thus the first man was called Adam because he was formed from the red earth. It is also the generic name of the human race (Gen. 1:26, 27; 5:2; 8:21; Deut. 8:3). Its equivalents are the Latin homo and the Greek anthropos (Matt. 5:13, 16). It denotes also man in opposition to woman (Gen. 3:12; Matt. 19:10).

(2.) Heb. ‘ish, like the Latin vir and Greek aner, denotes properly a man in opposition to a woman (1 Sam. 17:33;

→ CREATED Ge 1:26,27; 2:7; 5:1,2; De 4:32; Job 4:17; 10:2,3,8,9; 31:15; 33:4; 35:10; Ps 8:5; 100:3; 119:73; 138:8; 139:14; Ec 7:29; Isa 17:7; 42:5; 43:7; 45:12; 64:8; Jer 27:5; Zec 12:1; Mal 2:10; Mr 10:6; Heb 2:7

See CREATED IN THE IMAGE OF GOD, below

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%young man
young man67% · 2×a young man33% · 1×

3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial33%subject33%object33%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πούςthe foot
Article the
τὶς
δέbut, on the othe
Article the
φημίI say
νεανίαςyoung man
what comes after →
καλέωI call, invite, name
ΣαῦλοςSaul, the apostl
ὄνομαname, character, rep
ΕὔτυχοςEutychus
οὗτος
ἀπάγωI lead, carry, t

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνεανίας · 3× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 114c. AD 40

ποῦ τὸ βρέφος, ποῦ ὁ παῖς, ποῦ ὁ ἀντίπαις, ποῦ ὁ ἄρτι ἡβῶν, ποῦ τὸ μειράκιον, ὁ πρωτογένειος, ὁ νεανίας, ὁ τέλειος ἀνήρ;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.188c. AD 75–95

Τῆς Βενιαμίτιδος φυλῆς νεανίας Ἰούδης μὲν τοὔνομα Γήρα τε πατρὸς τολμῆσαί τε ἀνδρειότατος καὶ τῷ σώματι πρὸς τὰ ἔργα χρῆσθαι δυνατὸς τῶν χειρῶν τὴν ἀριστερὰν ἀμείνων κἀπʼ ἐκείνης τὴν ἅπασαν ἰσχὺν ἔχων κατῴκει μὲν ἐν Ἱεριχοῦντι καὶ αὐτός,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. BC 2nd c. AD

r … ιηι μεγάλως … … … ον νεανίαν … … α τρεῖς … … ν διὰ τὸ ἐμὲ

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 98Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 138–AD 139

Διδύμου τοῦ καὶ Κρησπείνου γενομένου κωμογραμματέως Ταλεὶ καὶ Ἰβιῶνος εἰκοσιπενταρούρων, Κάστωρ ῥήτωρ εἰπεν παρὰ Νεανίου καὶ Δομιττίου γεγυμνασιαρχηκότων ἐωνῆσθαι ἐν τῇ κώμῃ τὸν κωμογραμματέα ταλάντων πέντε κτήματα καὶ τὴν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ὀνόματιonoma named G3686 Noun · dative · singular · neuter
229× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A name refers to a person's character or authority, as in Matthew 10:2 and John 18:10. It represents who someone is or what they are known for. Jesus taught about the importance of a good name and reputation.
Tyndale gloss
name
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὄνομα (onoma) means 'name' and can refer to the title or reputation of a person or thing. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as indicating authority or character (e.g., Mt 10:41) and is often contrasted with the reality behind the name (e.g., Rev 3:1). The term can also signify a mere name or pretext, as seen in Mk 9:41.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄνομα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for שֵׁם;]

in general, the name by which a person or thing is called: Mt 10:2, Mk 3:16, Lk 1:63, Jo 18:10, al.; ἄνθρωπος (etc.), ᾧ (οὗ) ὄ. (τ. ὄ), sc. ἦν or ἐστίν (Bl., § 30, 3), Mk 14:32, Lk 1:26, 27; with same ellipsis, καὶ τ. ὄ. αὐτοῦ (ὄ. αὐτῷ), Lk 1:5, Jo 1:6, al.; ὀνόματι, seq. nom. prop., Mt 27:32, Mk 5:22, Lk 1:5, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄνομα, -ros, τό, (NOM [others TNO; see Vaniéek p. 1239], cf. Lat. nomen [Eng. name], with prefixed o [but see Curtius § 446]), Sept. for pw, [fr. Hom. down], the name by which a person or a thing is called, and distinguished from others; 1. univ.: of prop. names, Mk. iii. 16; vi. 14; Acts xiii. 8, etc. ; τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα, Mt. x. 2; Rev. xxi. 14; ἄνθρωπος or ἀνὴρ @ ὄνομα, πόλις ἢ Ov. , Sc. ἦν, named, foll. by the name in the nom. [ef. B. § 129, 20,3]: Lk. i. 26sq.; 11. 25; viii. 41; xxiv. 13,18; Acts xiii. 6, (Xen. mem. 3, 11, 1); οὗ [L ᾧ] τὸ ὄνομα, Mk. xiv. 32; καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, ete., Lk. i. 5, 27; ὄνομα αὐτῷ se. ἦν or ἐστίν [B. u.s.], Jn. i.6; ili. 1; xviii. 10; Rey. vi. 8; ὀνόματι, foll. by the name [cf. B. § 129 a. 3; W. 182 (171) ], Mt. xxvii. 32; Mk. v. 22; Lk.i. 5; x. 38; xvi. 20; xxiii.50; Actsv. 1,34; vili. 9; ix. 10-12, 33, 86; χ- 1; χὶ; 28,5 Χ- 19., χυ!. ἔν 14.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄνομα. (1) For ὄνομα, the ame by which a person or thing is called, we may cite: P Magd 24! (B.c. 218) Αἰγυπτία τις, ἧι λέγεται εἶναι ὄνομα Ψενοβάστι[ς, P Lond 854” (i/ii a.p.) (ΞΞ ΠΙ. p. 206, Selections p. 70) τῶν φίλων [ἐ]μ[ῶν τ]ὰ ὀνόματα ἐνεχάραξα τοῖς ἱ[εἸροῖς ἀειμνή (σὺ τως, “1 carved the names of my friends on the sanctuaries for perpetual remembrance ”—a traveller’s letter, and BGU 11. 4232 (i1/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 92) to[t]t [δέ] pov ὄνομα ᾿Αντῶνις Μάξιμος. Deissmann (1.4.3, p. 121) claims the phrase ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα as ‘‘a characteristic documentary formula,” e.g. P Oxy III. 485%! (a.p. 178) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐπὶ τῶν [τόπων δηλωθήσεται, ““ whose names will be ascertained on the spot” (Edd.), BGU 11. 432-38 (a.p. 190) ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται, “whose names are shown in the little book” (cf. Phil 43). (2) By a usage similar to that of the Heb. Dv’, ὄνομα comes in the NT to…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄνομα (onoma) — name.

ὄνομα,

Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ὄνῠμα [Refs]; Laconian dialect *ἔνυμα probably in proper nouns Ἐνυμακρατίδας [Refs]; poetry also (for the sake of meter) οὔνομα (see.below), which appears regularly in codices of [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in other Ionic dialect prose authors (variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+], but is probably not Ionic; Ionic dialect Inscrr. have only ὄνομα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] et saep.:—name of a person or thing, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of a person, except ἐρέω δέ τοι οὔνομα λαῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ἀρήτη δ᾽ ὄνομ᾽ ἐστὶν ἐπώνυμον [Refs 8th c.BC+] is used absolutely, by name, πόλις ὄ. Καιναί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὀνόματι λέγειν by name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατ᾽ ὄνομα by name, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἀσπάζου τοὺς φίλους κατ᾽ ὄ. each by his name…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄνομα

onoma

from a presumed derivative of the base of 1097 (compare 3685); a

"name" (literally or figuratively) (authority, character):--called, (+

sur-)name(-d).

see GREEK for 1097

see GREEK for 3685

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄνομα, ατος, τό

n.n.

name, character, reputation

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄνομα onoma 231x

a name; the proper name of a person, etc., Mt. 1:23, 25; 10:2; 27:32; a mere name or reputation, Rev. 3:1; in NT a name as the representative of a person, Mt. 6:9; Lk. 6:22; 11:2; the name of the author of a commission, delegated authority, or religious profession, Mt. 7:22; 10:22; 12:21; 18:5, 20; 19:29; 21:9; 28:19; Acts 3:16; 4:7, 12; εἰς ὄνομα, ἐν ὀνόματι, on the score of being possessor of a certain character, Mt. 10:41, 42; Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄνομα ὄνομα, ατος, τό, Lat. nomen, a name, Hom., etc.:—absol., by name, πόλις ὄνομα Καιναί Xen., etc.; also in dat., πόλις Θάψακος ὀνόματι id. Xen.

ὄν. θεῖναί τινα to give one a name, Od.; but commonly in Mid., ὄν. θέσθαι id. Od., attic; and for Pass., ὄν. κεῖταί τινι Ar., etc.; ὄν. ἔχειν ἀπό τινος Hdt.

ὄνομα καλεῖν τινα to call one by name, Od., attic; so with pass. verbs. ὄν. ὠνομάζετο Ἕλενος Soph.; ὄν. κέκληται δημοκρατία Thuc.

name. fame, Ἰθάκης γε καὶ ἐς Τροίην ὄνομ᾽ ἵκει Od.; τὸ μέγα ὄν. τῶν Ἀθηνῶν Thuc.; ὄνομα or τὸ ὄν. ἔχειν to have a name for a thing (good or bad), 2 opt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
81%name
name81% · 187×named13% · 29×names6% · 13×other renderings1% · 2×

231 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial57%object21%subject20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 229 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνἐπίδιά
ἐν
ἔρχομαιI come, goπᾶςall, the whole, ὕδωρwater
τὶς
δέbut, on the otheἱερεύςa priestἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐκἐπάνωon the top, abov
ὅς
ἀνήρa male human beiἹεροσόλυμαPropΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ὄνομαnamed229×
what comes after →
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἸησοῦςJesusἸωάννηςJohn
ἐγώ
ἐγώArticle theλέγωI say, speak
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pὅς
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
σῴζωI save, healὡσαννάHebrἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄνομα · 229× in the New Testament
Acts Revelation Luke John Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews Philippians 1 John James

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 527 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ἀλλ’ ὅ γε μέγας Μωυσῆς ἀλλοτριώτατον τοῦ ὁρατοῦ νομίσας εἶναι τὸ ἀγένητον — πᾶν γὰρ τὸ αἰσθητὸν ἐν γενέσει καὶ μεταβολαῖς οὐδέποτε κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὄν — τῷ μὲν ἀοράτῳ καὶ νοητῷ προσένειμεν ὡς ἀδελφὸν καὶ συγγενὲς ἀιδιότητα, τῷ δ’ αἰσθητῷ γένεσιν οἰκεῖον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.28c. AD 75–95

καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 43Thebais201 BC–102 BC

τὸ … κέναι ἡμῖν τὴν ἵππον καὶ παρʼ Ἰουδαίου … σθαι αὐτήν, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν. αὐτοῦ δὲ μηδʼ ἀποδεδωκότος ἡμῖν μηδὲ ἵππον μηδὲ τὴν πορείαν αὐτῆς ἐπιδεδωκότος, ἐγράψαμέν

P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ Ἀμπέλιον

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα Εἰρήνην καὶ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ΕὔτυχοςEutuchos Eutychus G2161 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Eutychus was a young man who fell from a window while Paul was preaching in Acts 20:9, but miraculously survived.
Tyndale gloss
Eutychus
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Εὔτυχος (Eutychus) means 'fortunate' and is used as a proper name for a young man mentioned in Acts 20:9. It is derived from the roots meaning 'well' and 'fate.' The lexicons note its appearance in inscriptions and variations of the name in different contexts, but there is no significant disagreement among them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Εὔτυχος, -ου, ὁ

(εὖ, τυχή),

Eutychus, a young man: Ac 20:9.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Εὔτυχος [i. 6. fortunate; on accent ef. W. 51; Chandler § 331 sq.], του, 6, Hutychus, a young man restored to life by Paul: Acts xx. 9.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Εὔτυχος. This proper name is common in the inscrr.: see also P Petr I. 128, where it is the name of a Syrian slave— παῖ[δας] Διονύσιον καὶ Eitvxoy Σύρους. The form Εἰὐτύχης is found in Perg 568° (Imperial times), and the fem. Evtuxls in Miche? 1560419 (c, B.c. 135). For the subst. εὐτυχία, as in 4 Macc 611 A, cf. P Tebt IT. 2841) (1/B.C.) ἐξ εὐτυχίας.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Εὔτυχος (Eutuchos) — Eutychus.

Εὔτυχος, -ου, ὁ

(εὖ, τυχή),

Butychus, a young man: Act.20:9.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Εὔτυχος

Eutuchos

from 2095 and a derivative of 5177; well- fated, i.e. fortunate;

Eutychus, a young man:--Eutychus.

see GREEK for 2095

see GREEK for 5177

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Εὔτυχος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Eutychus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Εὔτυχος eutychos 1x

Eutychus, pr. name, Acts 20:9*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

u'-ti-kus (Eutuchos, "fortunate"):

The story of Eutychus occurs in the "we" section of Acts, and is therefore related by an eyewitness of the incidents (Ac 20:7-12). On the first day of the week the Christians of Troas had met for an evening service in an upper chamber, and were joined by Paul and his company. As he was to leave in the morning, Paul "prolonged his speech until midnight." A youth named Eutychus, who was sitting at the open window, became borne down with sleep owing to the lateness of the hour, and ultimately fell through the opening from the third story. He "was taken up dead." This direct statement is evaded by De Wette and Olshausen, who translate "for dead." Meyer says this expresses the judgment of those who took him up. However, Luke, the physician, is giving his verdict, and he plainly believes that a miracle was…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Eutychus

Fortunate, (Acts 20:9-12), a young man of Troas who fell through drowsiness from the open window of the third floor of the house where Paul was preaching, and was “taken up dead.” The lattice-work of the window being open to admit the air, the lad fell out and down to the court below. Paul restored him to life again. (Comp. 1 Kings 17:21; 2 Kings 4:34.)

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(fortunate), a youth at Troas, (Acts 20:9) who sitting in a window, and having fallen asleep while St. Paul was discoursing, fell from the third story, and being taken up dead, was miraculously restored to life by the apostle.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A young man who was killed at Troas by falling from the window of a room in the third story, where Paul was preaching. His life was miraculously restored, Ac 20:6-12.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%eutychus
eutychus100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

ConcordanceΕὔτυχος · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 18.168c. AD 75–95

Προϊούσης δὲ ἐπὶ μέγα τῷ Ἀγρίππᾳ τῆς πρὸς Γάιον φιλίας αἰωρουμένοις ποτὲ λόγος περὶ τοῦ Τιβερίου γίνεται, καὶ τοῦ Ἀγρίππου κατʼ εὐχὰς τραπομένου, μόνω δʼ ἤστην, ᾗ τάχος Τιβέριον ὑπεκστάντα τῆς ἀρχῆς Γαΐῳ παραχωρεῖν ἀξιωτέρῳ τὰ πάντα ὄντι, τούτων…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD undated
P.Mich. 5 348Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 26

διὰ τῆς μισθώσεως καὶ μὴ ἐξέστω αὐτῶι προλιπεῖν τὴν μετοχήν. ὑπογραφεὺς τοῦ μὲν Παπνεβτύνεως Εὔτυχος Μάρωνος ὡς ἐτῶν ξ οὐλὴ γενείῳ ἐξ ἀριστερῶν. Χαιρήμων Ὥρου καὶ Ἡρώδης Ἡρώδου καὶ

P.Mich. 5 253ArsinoitesAD 30

τὴν πρᾶσιν πάσῃ βεβαιώσει ἀπὸ μὲν δημοσίων καὶ ἰδιωτικῶν καὶ παντὸς εἴδους καθὼς πρόκειται. Εὔτυχος γ Εὐτύχου γέγραφα ὑπὲρ τῆς μητρὸς ἐμοῦ μὴ εἰδυίης γράμματα καὶ ἐπιγέγραμμαι αὐτῆς κύριος.

P.Mich. 5 339ArsinoitesAD 46

ἐμοῦ τοῦ ἑαυτῆς προσγενοῦς Εὐτύχου τοῦ Ὀρσενούφεως γέγονʼ εἴς με ἡ ὁμολογία καθὼς πρόκιται. Εὔτυχος γέγραφα ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς μὴ εἰδυίας γράμματα καὶ ἐπιγέγραμμαι αὐτῆς κύριος.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἐπὶepi by G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίby886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τῆςho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
θυρίδος,thuris window, G2376 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A window is an opening in a wall for letting in light and air, like the one in Acts 20:9 where Eutychus fell out. In the Bible, windows are also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 11:33. The Greek word for window is used to describe an aperture or opening.
Tyndale gloss
window
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θυρίς is a diminutive form of θύρα, meaning 'window.' It appears in the New Testament in Acts 20:9 and 2 Corinthians 11:33, referring specifically to a window or small opening. The term also has broader applications in classical texts, including references to window frames and openings in various contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θυρίς, -ίδος, ἡ

(dim. of θύρα),

[in LXX chiefly for חַלּוֹן;]

a window: Ac 20:9, II Co 11:33.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θυρίς, -ίδος, ἡ, (dimin. of θύρα, prop. a little door; Plat., Dio Cass.), a window: Acts xx. 9; 2 Co. xi. 33. (Arstph., Theophr., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.; Sept.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θυρίς. In P Petr III. 4818 we hear of θυρίδας κοιλοστάθμους, where for the last word the editors refer to LXX Hagg 14, and for the corresponding verb to 3 Kings 6%, and understand the meaning to be to put a sheath of wood over the door-posts or the sides of the windows. (B.c. 13) describes a house θύραις καὶ θυρίσι kal κλεισί : see 74.15 for the verbs—tiv οἰκίαν τεθυρωμένην Kal τεθυριδωμένην καὶ κεκλεισμένην. [Θυριδόω is not in LS, but | κατάγειν θυσίας εἵνεκεν ταύρους. BGU IV. 111675 | cf. θυριδωτός.] Cf. also P Ryl II. 233° (ii/a-p.) τὰ μέλαθρα | τῶν θυρίδων τοῦ μεγάλου συμποσίου, ‘‘the beams of the windows in the great dining-hall” (Edd.), and P Oxy I. 697 (a.b. 190) where stolen barley is removed from a house διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς θυρίδος, “by the said door,” according to the editors, but any opening may be intended. In P Lond 35° (8.6. 161) (=I. p. 25) τὴν παρὰ [rot βα]σίλεως διὰ τῆς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θυρίς (thuris) — window.

θῠρίς, ίδος, ἡ,

diminutive of θύρα, window, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; window-frame, ἐναρμόσαι εἰς ἑκάστην τὴν θ. (opening) χαλκᾶς θ. (frames) [Refs]

__b audience-window of the king or high officials in Egypt, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. opening at each end of a bee's cell, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. valve of a bivalve fish, [Refs]

4. in plural, embrasures in battlements, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

II. in plural, planks, boards, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; tablets, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

II.2. cell of wasps, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θυρίς

thuris

from 2374; an aperture, i.e. window:--window.

see GREEK for 2374

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θυρίς, ίδος, ἡ

n.f.

a window-sill

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θυρίς thuris 2x

a small opening; a window, Acts 20:9; 2 Cor. 11:33*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θυρίς θυ^ρίς, ίδος Dim. of θύρα, Plat. a window, id. Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

win'-do.

See HOUSE, II, 1, (9).

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Window

Properly only an opening in a house for the admission of light and air, covered with lattice-work, which might be opened or closed (2 Kings 1:2; Acts 20:9). The spies in Jericho and Paul at Damascus were let down from the windows of houses abutting on the town wall (Josh. 2:15; 2 Cor. 11:33). The clouds are metaphorically called the “windows of heaven” (Gen. 7:11; Mal. 3:10). The word thus rendered in Isa. 54:12 ought rather to be rendered “battlements” (LXX., “bulwarks;” R.V., “pinnacles”), or as Gesenius…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The window of an Oriental house consists generally of an aperture closed in with lattice-work. (Judges 5:28; Proverbs 7:6) Authorized Version "casement;" (Ecclesiastes 12:3) Authorized Version "window;" (Solomon 2:9; Hosea 13:3) Authorized Version "chimney." Glass has been introduced into Egypt in modern times as a protection against the cold of winter, but lattice-work is still the usual, and with the poor the only, contrivance for closing the window. The windows generally look into the inner court of the house, but in every house one or more look into the street. In Egypt these outer windows generally project over the doorway. [HOUSE]

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ge 6:16; 26:8; Jos 2:15,21; 1Ki 6:4; Eze 40:16-36; Ac 20:9

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%window
window100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπί
διά
καίand, even, also,
θυρίςwindow,
what comes after →
καταφέρωI bring down, oppres
ὕπνοςsleep
ἐν
σαργάνηa basket

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθυρίς · 2× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Acts
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.216c. AD 75–95

καὶ καθιμήσασα διὰ θυρίδος αὐτὸν ἐξέσωσεν·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
BGU 3 1002Hermopolis56 BC

τῆς προγεγραμμένης οἰκίας ἐπί τινι μέρει ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ βορρᾶ καὶ λιβὸς ἀπὸ γωνίας θυρίδος Αἰλούρου τῆς πρώτης στέγης τῆς οἰκίας Ἀντιφίλου τοῦ προγεγραμμένου μου ἀδελφοῦ ἕως εἰς βορρᾶν

ZPE 24 (1977), p. 128Fundort: Oxyrhynchos ? (Oxyrynchites, Ägypten); Schreibort: AlexandriaAD 101–AD 200

τὴν τῆς θυρίδος σου κλεῖδα ἐάνπερ ᾖ ἔσω ἐκεῖ, εἰ μή, ὅπου ἐὰν … ᾖ σήμανον. οὐ

P.Oxy. 1 69OxyrhynchosAD 190

μόνας κριθῆς ἀρτάβας δέκα , ἃς καὶ ὑπονενοηκέναι καθεῖσθαι κατὰ μέρος διὰ τῆς αὐτῆς θυρίδος ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ ταύτης ἀποσύρματος σχοίνου, ὅπερ αὐτὴν φανερὸν πεποιηκέναι τῷ τῆς κώμης ἀρχεφόδῳ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
καταφερόμενοςkatapherō overpowered G2702 Verb · present · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To vote against or overcome, as in Acts 25:7 and 26:10, where it refers to casting a ballot or being overcome with sleep.
Amplified meaning
overcome, weighed down
Tyndale gloss
to vote against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καταφέρω (i.e., *kataphero*) is formed from the prefix κατα- and the root φέρω. It generally means to bring down or to bear down, and can refer to actions like casting a vote or being overcome by sleep. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Acts 20:9, where it describes being weighed down by drowsiness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατα-φέρω,

[in LXX for ירד hi., etc.;]

to bring down: αἰτιώματα, Ac 25:7; ψῆφον, to cast a ballot, Ac 26:10; pass., to be borne down: ὕπνῳ, ἀπὸ τ. ὕ., Ac 20:9.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατα-φέρω; | aor. κατήνεγκα; Pass., pres. καταφέρομαι; 1 aor. κατηνέχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring down, cast down: ψῆφον, prop. to cast a pebble or caleulus se. into the urn, i. 6. to give one’s vote, /o approve, Acts xxvi. 10; αἰτιώματα κατά twos (see κατά, I. 2 b. [but the crit. edd. reject κατὰ xrA.]), Acts xxv. 7 LT Tr WH. Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the pavement), ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, from sleep (from the effect of his deep sleep [ef. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)]), Acts xx. 9°; metaph. to be weighed down by, overcome, carried away, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, sunk in a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9"; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401) ] is the expression in prof. auth. καταφέρομαι cis ὕπνον. to sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5,5; Hdian. 2,1, 3 [2]; 9,6 [5]; τοῖσιν ὕπνοισιν, Hipp. p. 1137 ο. [(Kiihn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταφέρω is used with reference to an assault in P Tebt I. 138 (late ii/B.C.) σπασάμενος ταύτην (sc. μάχαιραν) βουλόμενός pe ἀλογῆσαι κατήνεγκε [πλ]ηγαῖς τρισὶ καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὸν τράχηλον. For the meaning ‘bring down,” ‘carry down,” cf. P Giss I, 40% 19 (A.D. 215) οἵτινες κάλαμον πρ[ὸ]ς τὸ ὑποκαίειν τὰ βαλα[νεῖ]α Katadépovor, P Oxy X. 129219 (c. A.D, 30) ἐὰν δὲ χρέαν ἔχῃ (1. —ys) μάλιστία] EvAaplov δύο ἵνα μοι τὸν τροχὸν τῆς μηχανῆς κατενέγκῃς, “if you specially require two pieces of wood to bring down to me the wheel of the machine” (Edd.), and of ‘‘ bringing down”’ corn to Alexandria 74. 1260%8 (A.D. 286) κατενεγκῶ καὶ παραδώσω ὡς προκεῖται. Similarly of a dead body, 26. VII. 10688 (iii/A.D.) εἵνα δυνηθῶ Td σωμάτιν κατενενκῖν ἐν ᾿Αλεξάνδριαν : cf. OGZS 6748! ταφῆς ἀναφερομένης καὶ καταφερομένης, with Dittenberger’s note. The special usage in Ac 20° is well illustrated by Ps…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταφέρω (katapherō) — to vote against.

καταφέρω,

future κατοίσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 κατήνεγκα [LXX], infinitive - ενεγκεῖν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Doric dialect κατέφειρα [Refs]:—bring down, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] will bring me down to the grave, Il.[same place]; βαρυπεσῆ καταφέρω ποδὸς ἀκμάν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of rivers, κ. χρυσίον, γῆν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially of cutting instruments, κ. τὴν σμινύην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὴν δίκελλαν, τὴν σφῦραν, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] let it fall upon him, [LXX+1st c.AD+]: absolutely, hew downwards, deal a blow, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

__b pull down, demolish, πύργους [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἥλους (warts) [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

__c pay down, discharge, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταφέρω

kataphero

from 2596 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear down, i.e.

(figuratively) overcome (with drowsiness); specially, to cast a

vote:--fall, give, sink down.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταφέρω

v.

I bring down, oppress

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταφέρω katapherō 4x

to bear down; to overpower, as sleep, Acts 20:9; καταφέρειν ψῆφον, to give a vote or verdict, Acts 26:10; to bring charges, Acts 25:7*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταφέρω fut. κατ-οίσω epic -οίσομαι to bring down, ἄχος με κατοίσεται Ἄϊδος εἴσω grief will bring me down to the grave, Il.; καταφέρω ποδὸς ἀκμάν I bring down my foot, Aesch.:—Pass. to be brought down by a river, of gold dust, Hdt.

of a storm, to drive ships to land, Thuc.

to pay down, Plut.

Pass. to be weighed down by sleep, NTest.

to carry home, Ar.:—Pass. to return, id. Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-NSM — Verb · present · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%overpowered
overpowered25% · 1×having been overpowered25% · 1×presenting25% · 1×i cast against25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
θυρίςa window-sill
Article the
πολύςmuch, many, often
ἐπί
αἰτίωμαa charge, accusation
βαρύςheavy, weighty,
αὐτός
τέDisj
καταφέρωoverpowered
what comes after →
ὕπνοςsleep
βαθύςdeep, early, pro
ἀπό
Article the
ὅς
οὐNeg
ψῆφοςa pebble, a vote

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταφέρω · 4× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.337c. AD 75–95

Ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας Σαοῦλος ἄφωνος ὑπὸ λύπης ἐγένετο καὶ κατενεχθεὶς εἰς τοὔδαφος, εἴτε διὰ τὴν προσπεσοῦσαν ἐκ τῶν δεδηλωμένων ὀδύνην, εἴτε διὰ τὴν ἔνδειαν, οὐ γὰρ προσενήνεκτο τροφὴν τῇ παρελθούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ τε καὶ νυκτί, ῥᾳδίως ἔκειτο νέκυς ὥς τις.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ὕπνῳhupnos by sleep G5258 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Sleep, as in a natural rest, like in Matthew 1:24, or a spiritual sleep, as in Romans 13:11.
Tyndale gloss
sleep
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὕπνος (*hupnos*) means 'sleep' and can also refer to 'slumber.' It appears in various contexts, including literal sleep in passages like Matthew 1:24 and Acts 20:9, and metaphorically in Romans 13:11 to denote spiritual slumber. The term has roots in ancient literature, where it is sometimes associated with death, described as a twin brother of Death in mythology.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὕπνος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX for שֵׁנָה, חֲלוֹם, etc. ;]

sleep: Mt 1:24, Lk 9:32, Jo 11:13, Ac 20:9; metaph., Ro 13:11.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὕπνος, -ov, ὁ, [i. 6. σύπνος, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus; Curtius ὃ 3911, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 713¥, sleep: prop., Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi.13; Acts xx.9; metaph. ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι (see ἐγείρω, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὕπνος. For the significance of visions granted in sleep (cf. Gen 2810. 1 Kingd 3°), we may note the important PSI IV. 435° (B.c. 258-7) (= Deissmann ZAZ?, p. 153), where a certain Zoilus writes to his friend and patron Apollonius— ἐμοὶ συμβέβηκεν θεραπεύοντι τὸν θεὸν Σάραπιν περὶ τῆς σῆς ὑγιείας... τὸν Σάραπίμ μοι χρημα[τίζει]ν πλε[ον Ἰά κ[ι]ς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις, ὅπως ἂν διαπλεύσω πρὸς σὲ καὶ ἐμ[φανίσω σοι τοῦτ]οἵ ν] τὸ[ν] χρηματισμόν, ““1ι happened to me, while serving the god Sarapis for thy health . . ., that Sarapis warned me many a time in sleep that I should sail over to thee and signify to thee this answer’: cf. P Par 45° (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski?, p. 85, UPZ i. p. 329) ὁρῶ [[rov]} ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ τὸν δραπέδην Μενέδημον ἀντικείμενον ἡμῖν, P Lond 121410 (iii/A.pD.) (=I. p. 97) εἰδέτω por. . . ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις, a spell for making a person talk in his sleep. From the inscrr. we may cite OG/S…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὕπνος (hupnos) — sleep.

ὕπνος, ὁ,

sleep, slumber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the sleep of death, κοιμήσατο χάλκεον ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+] — Special phrases:

I. of going to sleep, μιν ἐπήλυθε.. ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ὕπνῳ or ὕπνῳ πεσεῖν to fall a-sleep, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ᾽ ἐνδόντα (so Badham for εὕδοντά) μ᾽ ἐξεγείρετε [Refs]; also ὕπνῳ δεδμημένος, δαμείς, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νικώμενος, κρατηθεῖσ᾽, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. of waking from sleep, ἐγεῖραί τινα ἐξ ὕπνου [Refs 8th c.BC+]: of the sleeper, ἀνόρουσε, ἔγρετο, ἐξ ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.3. with Preps., when the plural also is not uncommon, ἐν ὕπνῳ in sleep, in a dream, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς ὕ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ὕπνον ὄντα…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὕπνος

hupnos

from an obsolete primary (perhaps akin to 5259 through the idea of

subsilience); sleep, i.e. (figuratively) spiritual torpor:--sleep.

see GREEK for 5259

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὕπνος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

sleep

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὕπνος hypnos 6x

sleep, Mt. 1:24; Lk. 9:32; Jn. 11:13; Acts 20:9; met. spiritual sleep, religious slumber, Rom. 13:11*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὕπνος ὕ^πνος, ὁ, sleep, slumber, Hom., etc.; χάλκεος ὕπνος, i. e. the sleep of death, Il.:— ὕπνος τινὰ ἐπέρχεται, ἐπορούει, ἱκάνει, αἱρεῖ, λαμβάνει Hom., etc.; εἰς ὕπνον πεσεῖν Soph.:— ἐν ὕπνῳ in sleep, Eur.;— καθ᾽ ὕπνον Soph.;— περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον about one's first sleep, Ar.

Sleep, twin-brother of Death, Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

slep: Represents many words in Hebrew and Greek. For the noun the most common are shenah, and hupnos; for the verb, yashen, shakhabh, and katheudo. The figurative uses for death (De 31:16, etc.) and sluggishness (Eph 5:14, etc.) are very obvious.

See DREAM.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ From God Ps 127:2

→ Of the sluggard (very lazy person) Pr 6:9,10

→ Of Jesus Mt 8:24; Mr 4:38; Lu 8:23

→ A symbol of death Job 14:12; Mt 9:24; Mr 5:39; Lu 8:52; Joh 11:11,12; 1Th 4:14

→ See DEATH

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%sleep
sleep100% · 6×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀπόκοίμησιςrepose, taking r
βαρέωI weight, load, burd
εἰμίI am, exist
καταφέρωI bring down, oppres
θυρίςa window-sill
ἐκ
σύ
ὕπνοςby sleep
what comes after →
ποιέωI do, make
ὡςas, like as, how
διαγρηγορέωI awake out of sleep
δέbut, on the othe
λέγωI say, speak
βαθύςdeep, early, profoun
διαλέγομαιI converse, addr
πίπτωI fall, fall under
ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὕπνος · 6× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Romans
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.26c. AD 40

ἴδωμεν δὲ καὶ θάτερον, πῶς ὕπνῳ χρῆται ὁ νοῦς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.82c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὲ ταύτην τὴν ὄψιν διεγερθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὕπνου καὶ τεταραγμένος ὢν καὶ τί ποτʼ εἴη τὸ φάντασμα παρʼ ἐμαυτῷ σκοπῶν καταφέρομαι πάλιν εἰς ὕπνον καὶ δεύτερον ὄναρ ὁρῶ πολὺ τοῦ προτέρου θαυμασιώτερον, ὅ με καὶ μᾶλλον ἐκφοβεῖ καὶ ταράττει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD
CPR 23 2ArsinoitesAD 38–AD 41

ηι τῶι γράφοντι τόν Ἀρσινοΐτην παρὰ Μάρκου Ἀπωνίου Ὕπνου ἐπιτρόπου Μάρκου Ἀπωνίου Σατουρνίνου. τοῦ ὑπο … … ου δέομαι τὸ ἀντίγραφον

ἐπὶ οὖν σαθ … … τῶσθαι μὴ καί τι λόγον ποιουμένου … … ἐξ ὕπνου ἀναστὰς γενόμενος ἐνθάδε … … λ … περὶ τῶν ὀρφανῶν ὡς προεῖπον η ἐσχ

SB 1 4317AlexandriaAD 200

1 Πτολεμαῖος Διοδώρᾳ τῇ ἀδελφῇ χαίρειν. γινώσκειν σε θέλω, ὅτι ὕπνος οὐκ ἔρχεταί μοι διὰ νυκτὸς χάριν τῆς σῆς ἀπροαιρέσεως καὶ τῆς σῆς ἀπροθυμίας, ἣν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
βαθεῖ,bathus deep G901 Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for deep means something that goes far down, like a deep well in John 4:11 or the deep sleep in Acts 20:9. It can also describe something that is profound or intense. In Luke 24:1, it describes the early dawn.
Amplified meaning
profound, far down
Tyndale gloss
deep
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βαθύς is an adjective meaning 'deep' or 'profound,' applicable both literally and metaphorically. It can describe physical depth, such as in water or sleep, as well as abstract concepts like wisdom or time. The New Testament uses it in contexts like deep sleep (Acts 20:9) and deep morning twilight (Luke 24:1). There is some variation in how lexicons describe its applications, particularly regarding metaphorical uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βαθύς (gen. -έως, vernac., Lk 24:1; Bl., § 8, 5), -εῖα, -ύ,

[in LXX chiefly for עמק;]

deep; Jo 4:11; metaph., ὄρθρου βαθέως (v. supr.), early dawn, Lk 24:1; ὕπνος, Ac 20:9; τὰ β. τοῦ Σατανᾶ, Re 2:24.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βαθύς, -εἴα, -v, [cf. βάθος, deep; prop.: Jn. iv. 11. metaph.: ὕπνος, a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9 (Sir. xxii. 7; often also in Grk. writ.) ; ὄρθρος (see βαθέως), Lk. xxiv. 1 ([Arstph. vesp. 216]; Plat. Crito 43 ἃ. ; Polyaen. 4, 9, 1; ἔτι βαθέος ὄρθρον, Plat. Prot. 310 a. [cf. also Philo de mutat. nom. ὃ 30; de vita Moys. i. § 32]); τὰ βαθέα τοῦ Σατανᾶ, Rey. ii. 24 (G 1, Τ Tr WH; ef. βάθος).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βαθύς. For B. associated with time (class.), as in Lk 24}, cf. P Lips 1. 4o¥- 10 (iv/v A.p.) ὀψὲ πάνν βαθ[ε]ίας ἑσπέρ[ας. So in the fragment of an epithalamium (iv/a.D.), P Ryl I. 17®&— ὁμοφροσύνην δ᾽ ὀπάσε[ιε ἤδη που θεὸς ἄμμι καὶ αὐτίκα τέκνα γενέϊσ7θαν καὶ πα[ίδων παῖδας καὶ ἐς βαθὺ γῆρας ἱκέσθ[αι. It is applied to colour in P Lond 899* (ii/A.p.) (= IIL. p. 208) τὸ οὖν βαθύτερον (sc. πορφύριον) πεποίηται εἰς TO σπανου (?) καὶ τὸ ὀξύτερον εἰς τί] ἄλλ[ο]. The comparative βαθύτερον is also found P Petr III. 43 (2) γεεζοῖν. 18 (B.C. 245) (p. 121). Note a new compound, recalling the combination in Lk 643, P Hal I. 1-8 (iii/B.c.), where a πολιτικὸς νόμος is headed φυτίεύσ]εως kal οἰκοδομ[ίας] kal β[αθ]νορυί…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βαθύς (bathus) — deep.

βᾰθύς, βαθεῖα

Ionic dialect βαθέᾰ, βαθύ; feminine βαθύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; genitive βαθέος, βαθείας Ionic dialect βαθέης: dative βαθέϊ, βαθείῃ Ionic dialect βαθέῃ: comparative βαθύτερος, poetry βαθίων [ῑ Attic dialect, ῐ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—deep or high, accusative to one's position, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; βαθέης ἐξάλλεται αὐλῆς a court within a high fence, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἠϊόνος προπάροιθε βαθείης the deep, i.e. wide, shore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κύλικες [Refs]; βαθὺ πτῶμα a fall from a high rock, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πλευρὰ βαθυτάτη (vulgar form βαρυτάτη), of an athlete, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a line of battle, βαθύτεραι φάλαγγες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; β. τομή, πληγή, a deep cut, [Refs 1st…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βαθύς

bathus

from the base of 939; profound (as going down), literally or

figuratively:--deep, very early.

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βαθύς, εῖα, ύ

Adj

deep, early, profound

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βαθύς bathus 4x

deep, Jn. 4:11; met. deep, profound, Acts 20:9; Rev. 2:24; ὄρθρου βαθέος, lit. at deep morning twilight, at the earliest dawn, Lk. 24:1*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βαθύς deep or high, acc. to one's position, like Lat. altus, Hom., etc.; βαθέης αὐλῆς from high-fenced court, Il.; ἠιόνος προπάροιθε βαθείης the deep, i. e. wide, shore, id. Il.; in Prose, of a line of battle, Xen.

deep or thick in substance, of a mist, Hom.; of ploughed land, opp. to stony ground, Il., Eur.:— deep, thick, of woods, corn, clouds, Il., Hdt., etc.; of hair, Xen.

violent, of a storm, Il.

generally, large, copious, abundant, κλέος, κλῆρος Pind.; βαθεῖα τέρψις Soph.; βαθὺς ἀνήρ a rich man, Xen.; β. ὕπνος deep sleep, Theocr.

of the mind, deep, Il., Aesch.; βαθύτερα ἤθεα Hdt.

of Time, far-advanced, late, βαθὺς ὄρθρος (v. ὄρθρος); βαθὺ τῆς ἡλικίας Ar.; β. γῆρας Anth.

adv. βαθέως, Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSM — Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(tehom; abussos, Lu 8:31 the King James Version; Ro 10:7 the King James Version; bathos, Lu 5:4; buthos, 2Co 11:25):

The Hebrew word ("water in commotion") is used

(1) of the primeval watery waste (Ge 1:2), where some suggest a connection with Babylonian Tiamat in the creation-epic;

(2) of the sea (Isa 51:10 and commonly);

(3) of the subterranean reservoir of water (Ge 7:11; 8:2; 49:25; De 33:13; Eze 31:4, etc.).…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Deep

Used to denote (1) the grave or the abyss (Rom. 10:7; Luke 8:31); (2) the deepest part of the sea (Ps. 69:15); (3) the chaos mentioned in Gen. 1:2; (4) the bottomless pit, hell (Rev. 9:1, 2; 11:7; 20:13).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%deep
deep50% · 2×deeps25% · 1×very early25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial50%predicate25%object25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὄρθροςearly dawn, day-brea
σάββατονthe Sabbath, a w
εἰμίI am, exist
φρέαρa pit, well
ὕπνοςsleep
καταφέρωI bring down, op
Article the
γινώσκωI come to know,
βαθύςdeep
what comes after →
ἐπί
Article the
πόθενIrg
οὖνtherefore, then
διαλέγομαιI converse, address,
Article the
Article the
Σατανᾶςan adversary, Sa

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβαθύς · 4× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Revelation
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 15 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 63c. AD 40

χαίρει γὰρ τὰ μέν τινα τεναγώδει καὶ οὐ πάνυ βαθείᾳ θαλάττῃ, τὰ δ’ ὑποδρόμοις καὶ λιμέσι μήτ’ ἐπὶ γῆν ἀνέρπειν μήτε πόρρω γῆς ἐπινήχεσθαι δυνάμενα, τὰ δὲ κατὰ μέσον καὶ βαθὺ πέλαγος διαιτώμενα τὰς προκεχυμένας ἄκρας ἢ νήσους ἢ πέτρας ἐκτρέπεται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Hamb. 4 251Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 143–AD 144

ξυλίνων δραχμὰς ἑξήκοντα , τασ … π … … … καὶ χαλκωμάτων σκάφιον βαθὺ ὁλκῆς μνῶν … … καὶ ἄνευ πάσης ὑπερθέσεως καὶ εὑρησιλογίας α

P.Oxy. 14 1742OxyrhynchosAD 301–AD 400

r Κυλλάστιος … … λίτραι ε, βαθυ … λίτραι ε, ἐλαίου ξέσται ϛ, καλάμια μεγάλα μερ ε, κερκίδια γερδιακὰ ν, σόλια

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
διαλεγομένουdialegō as is talking G1256 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To dispute or argue with someone, like in Acts 18:4 where Paul discusses with the Jews in Corinth. It can also mean to preach or reason with others, as seen in Acts 17:17. This word is about exchanging ideas and opinions.
Amplified meaning
preached, discoursed
Tyndale gloss
to dispute
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διαλέγομαι is a middle voice verb meaning to converse, discuss, or argue. It is built from the prefix δια- (through) and the root λέγω (to say). The term appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in Acts, where it is used to describe reasoning and discourse, such as in Acts 17:2 and 18:4. The lexicons generally agree on its meanings, with no significant disagreements noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δια-λέγομαι

(mid. of διαλέγω, to pick out, distinguish, as depon.),

[in LXX: Ex 6:27, Is 63:1 (דּבר pi.), Jg 8:1 (ריב), I Es 8:46, Es 5:2, Si 14:20, II Mac 11:20 * ;]

to converse with, discourse (v. Cl. Rev., i, 45), discuss, argue: Ac 18:4 19:8, 9 20:9; c. dat. pers., Ac 17:17 18:19 20:7, He 12:5; seq. πρός, Mk 9:34, Ac 17:17 24:12…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δια-λέγομαι ; impf. διελεγόμην ; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. δὲελέξατο (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor. διελέχθην ; (mid. of διαλέγω, to select, distinguish) ; at: to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with thought (cf. διαλογίζομαι) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, discourse with one, argue, discuss: absol., Acts [xviii. 4]; xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 25; τινί, with one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts xvii. 2; πρός twa, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea of disputing prominent: πρὸς ἀλλήλους, foll. by interrog. tis, Mk. ix. 34; περί twos, Jude 9.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διαλέγομαι. P Oxy X. 1349 (iv)A.D.) ἐπειδὴ ἐξῆλθα ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐχθὲς μὴ διαλεχθείς σοι περὶ τῆς κυθίδος (ἡ. ε. κυθρ. -- χυτρ.). VP Petr 1ΠΠ. 43 (3)!® (B.c. 240) ἔτι δὲ [οὐ]κ ἀγνοεῖς ὡς σοὶ διελέγην περὶ τοῦ ση[σ]άμου, ‘you know how I conversed with you about the sesame” (Edd.). BGU IV. 10804 (2 ili/a.D.) καθὼς οὖν 6 ἀδελφός σου ᾿Αμμωνᾶς διείλεκταί μοι περὶ ὑμῶν καὶ τῶν ὑμῶν πραγμάτων. P Flor II. 132% (A.D. 257) τοῖς κωμάρχαις τῆς Tavpetvou διελέχθην περὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ὀνηλάτου. These instances will suffice to show that διαλέγεσθαι has in the vernacular the use seen in Mk οὗ, Elsewhere in the NT, as Bp E. L. Hicks points out in Ολ᾽ 1. p. 45, “*it always is used of addressing, preaching, lecturing,” a use which he shows to be predominant in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διαλέγω (dialegō) — to dispute.

διαλέγω,

pick out, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πτῶμα glean fallen olives, [Refs]; compare διαλέγειν· ἀνακαθαίρειν, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; select, separate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; examine, check documents, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. διαλέγων τὴν ὀπήν picking open the hole, to escape, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare διαλέξαι· διορύξαι, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

__B as deponent verb, διαλέγομαι: future διαλέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] also -λεχθήσομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; -λεγήσομαι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist διελεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect imperative ζάλεξαι [Refs 7th c.BC+], and always in Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs]: less frequently aorist 2 διελέγην [Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural διέλεγεν [Refs]: perfect διείλεγμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect διείλεκτο [Refs 4th c.BC+], but in passive sense, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διαλέγομαι

dialegomai

middle voice from 1223 and 3004; to say thoroughly, i.e. discuss (in

argument or exhortation):--dispute, preach (unto), reason (with),

speak.

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 3004

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διαλέγομαι

v.

I converse, address, preach, lecture

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διαλέγομαι dialegomai 13x

to discourse, argue, reason, Acts 17:2, 17; 24:12; to address, speak to, Heb. 12:5; to contend, dispute, Mk. 9:34; Jude 9

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-GSM — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ With God

See COMMUNION

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%he was reasoning
he was reasoning23% · 3×reasoning23% · 3×he reasoned15% · 2×talking8% · 1×as is talking8% · 1×when reasoning8% · 1×addresses8% · 1×they had been discussing8% · 1×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
τρεῖςthree
σάββατονthe Sabbath, a wμήν (II)a month
γάρfor
ἀλλήλων
συναγωγήan assembly, congreg
Article the
ἡμέραa day
κατά
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
διαλέγομαιas is talking13×
what comes after →
ἐν
Article the
αὐτός
ἀπόμέλλωI am about to
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐναὐτός
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishΠαῦλοςPaul
μένDisj
οὖνtherefore, then

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιαλέγομαι · 13× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Jude Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.101c. AD 40

ὅτε μὲν παραινεῖ ἀπὸ παντὸς ξύλου τοῦ παραδείσου ἐσθίειν, ἕνα προτρέπει, ὅτε δὲ ἀπαγορεύει χρῆσθαι τῷ πονηροῦ καὶ καλοῦ αἰτίῳ, πλείοσι διαλέγεται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.89c. AD 75–95

Ταῦτʼ εἰπὼν προάγει τὸν λαὸν γυναιξὶν ὁμοῦ καὶ τέκνοις, ὡς ἀκούσαιεν τοῦ θεοῦ διαλεγομένου πρὸς αὐτοὺς περὶ τῶν πρακτέων, ἵνα μὴ βλαβείη τῶν λεγομένων ἡ ἀρετὴ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης γλώττης ἀσθενῶς εἰς γνῶσιν αὐτοῖς παραδιδομένη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
PSI 4 330Philadelphia (Arsinoites)258 BC

ἡμᾶς μεταλαβεῖν, οὗτος δὲ τῆι μεγίστηι με ἀτιμίαι περιβέβληκεν. περὶ μὲν γὰρ διαφόρου οὐ διαλέγομαι ὅσον εἰσενήνοχα ἀδίκως μετὰ βίας παρανομηθείς. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους κη, Δύστρου ιη.

Stud.Pal. 5 50Hermopolis (HermopolitesAD 201–AD 300

Ἰσίδωρος αι … … … θυμότερον η … … … υ διαλέγομαι ου … … χορηγίας ἥτις … … ν τισιν ταυ … … … τὰ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ΠαύλουPaulos Paul G3972 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
158× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Paul, originally named Saul, was a Roman apostle who wrote many letters in the New Testament, including Romans and 1 Corinthians. He is a key figure in the early Christian church.
Tyndale gloss
Paul
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Παῦλος (transliterated as Paulos) refers to Paul, a prominent figure in the New Testament, specifically the Apostle Paul. It is of Latin origin, meaning 'little,' and is used frequently in the Acts of the Apostles and the Epistles. The name also appears in reference to Sergius Paulus, a Roman proconsul mentioned in Acts 13:7.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

Sergius Paulus: Ac 13:7.

the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Ac 13:9, and freq. throughout Ac., Ro 1:1, I Co 1:1, al., II Pe 3:15.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Παῦλος. The designation Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος οἱ Ac 13° is fully discussed by Deissmann 4S, p. 313 ff., where it is shown that the Apostle was already in possession of the double name at the time referred to: cf. Ramsay Paw/, p. 81 ff. Elsewhere (Recent Discovery, p. 356) Ramsay suggests that Paul’s complete Roman name may have been “Ὁ. Julius Paullus,” in view of the frequent conjunction of the names Julius Paullus in Lycaonia. In the important letter on the Meletian Schism, P Lond 19145® (A.D. 3352), greetings are conveyed to Παῦλον τὸν ἀναγνώστην : the editor refers to a priest of the same name (ἀπὸ Tnévas) in 2. 191744 (c. A.D. 330-340), and to ὃ μακάριος Παῦλος in 74. 1919% (same date). The name is not uncommon in the inscrr., see e.g. Perg 374 A® (time of Augustus), where ’A. Καστρίκιος Παῦλος is included among the choristers of θεὸς Σεβαστὸς kal θεὰ Ρώμη in Pergamum: cf. Thieme…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paul.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15.

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paulus.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

∏αῦλος

Paulos

of Latin origin; (little; but remotely from a derivative of 3973,

meaning the same); Paulus, the name of a Roman and of an

apostle:--Paul, Paulus.

see GREEK for 3973

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Παῦλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Paul

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Παῦλος Paulos 158x

Paulus, Paul, pr. name. (1) Paul, the Apostle, Acts 13:9, et al. freq. (2) Sergius Paulus, the deputy or proconsul of Cyprus, Acts 13:7

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Paul

=Saul (q.v.) was born about the same time as our Lord. His circumcision-name was Saul, and probably the name Paul was also given to him in infancy “for use in the Gentile world,” as “Saul” would be his Hebrew home-name. He was a native of Tarsus, the capital of Cilicia, a Roman province in the south-east of Asia Minor. That city stood on the banks of the river Cydnus, which was navigable thus far; hence it became a centre of extensive commercial traffic with many countries along the shores of the Mediterranean, as well as with the countries of central Asia Minor. It thus became a city distinguished for the wealth of its inhabitants.

Tarsus was also the seat of a famous university, higher in reputation even than the universities of Athens and Alexandria, the only others that then existed. Here Saul was born, and here he spent his youth, doubtless enjoying the best education…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(small, little). Nearly all the original materials for the life St. Paul are contained in the Acts of the Apostles and in the Pauline epistles. Paul was born in Tarsus, a city of Cilicia. (It is not improbable that he was born between A.D. 0 and A.D. 5.) Up to the time of his going forth as an avowed preacher of Christ to the Gentiles, the apostle was known by the name of Saul. This was the Jewish name which he received from his Jewish parents. But though a Hebrew of the Hebrews, he was born in a Gentile city. Of his parents we know nothing, except that his father was of the tribe of Benjamin, (Philemon 3:5) and a Pharisee, (Acts 23:6) that Paul had acquired by some means the Roman franchise ("I was free born,") (Acts 22:23)…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The distinguished "apostle of the Gentiles;" also called SAUL, a Hebrew name. He is first called Paul in Ac 13:12; and as some think, assumed this Roman name according to a common custom of Jews in foreign lands, or in honor of Sergius Paulus, Ac 13:7, his friend and an early convert. Both names however may have belonged to him in childhood. He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia, and inherited from his father the privileges of a Roman citizen. His parents belonged to the tribe of Benjamin, and brought up their son as "a Hebrew of the Hebrews," Php 3:5. Tarsus was highly distinguished for learning and culture, and the opportunities for improvement it afforded were no doubt diligently improved by Paul. At a suitable age he was sent to…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

small; little

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%paul
paul97% · 159×other renderings3% · 5×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject60%object18%adverbial15%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 158 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheτότεthenτέDisj
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἀνίστημιI raise up, set διαπονέομαιI am greatly tro
ἐγώ
δέbut, on the otheὁράωI see, look uponχάρινon account of
καίand, even, also, nam
ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasArticle the
χείρa hand
ἐμόςArticle the
ΠαῦλοςPaul158×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasΣιλᾶςSilas
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciσυνέδριονa council, the S
λέγωI say, speak
διάArticle theθέλωI will, wish, de
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a messen
Χριστόςanointed, the MeοὐNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,ἀξιόωI account or treἐπιλέγωI call, choose f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΠαῦλος · 158× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Colossians Philemon 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 19.102c. AD 75–95

προεξῄεσαν δὲ Κλαύδιος μὲν ὁ πάτρως αὐτοῦ καὶ Μᾶρκος Βινίκιος ὁ τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἀνὴρ ἔτι δὲ Οὐαλέριος Ἀσιατικός, οὓς οὐδὲ βουλομένοις διακλεῖσαι δύναμις ἦν αἰδοῖ τῆς ἀξιώσεως, εἵπετο δʼ αὐτὸς σὺν Παύλῳ Ἀρουντίῳ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 5.5c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλον καὶ ἔριν Παῦλος ὑπομονῆς βραβεῖον ὑπέδειξεν,

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.12.2c. AD 110

πάροδός ἐστε τῶν εἰς θεὸν ἀναιρουμένων, Παύλου συμμύσται τοῦ ἡγιασμένου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD
ÉdP 7 (1948), p. 40-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 311

σαργάνη α Ἀεῖς Σαλιοῦτος σαργάνη α Ἰσίδωρος Ἡρᾶ σαργάνη α Ἥρων Ἀπώνεως σαργάνη α Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου σαργάνη α Πελῆνις σαργάναι β Ἀχιλλᾶς Ἀντωνίνου σαργάνη α Ἰσιδώρα Πτολεμαίου σαργάνη α

P.Cair. Isid. 20Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

Ἀτισίου Διόσκορος Κάστορος Παμοῦν Ἥρωνος Νεᾶς μητρὸς Τύχης κτηνῶν ὁμοίως Ἀτῖσις Ἀβοίκεως Δοῦλος Λεονίδου Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου Σαβῖνος Ἀχιλλᾶ Οὐενᾶφρις Ἀιώνεως Σώτας Ἀπολλωνίου Παῆσις Σεταβοῦ Οὐενᾶφρις Παησίου Κοπρῆς Παλήμωνος Μιὼς

P.Cair. Isid. 28Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 312–AD 323

δραχμαὶ Γ Ἡρᾶς Βακχείου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Ἁτρῆς εἰρηνάρχης ἀρτάβαι β τάλαντα β Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Κάλλων Οὐενάφρεως ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Παπέεις Ἀιώνεως ἀρτάβη

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἐπὶepi on G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

On

Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See HELIOPOLIS.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

pain; force; iniquity

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίon886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
πλεῖον,polus longer, G4119 Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
386× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
much
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλέον, v.s. πολύς.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πολύς, πολλή (fr. an older form πολλός, found in Hom., Hes., Pind.), πολύ; [(cf. Curtius § 375)]; Sept. chiefly for 39; much; used a. of multitude, number, etc., many, numerous, great: ἀριθμός, Acts xi. 21; λαός, Acts xviii. 10; ὄχλος, Mk. v. 24; vi. 34; [viii.1 LT Tr WH]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; Jn. vi. 2,5; Rev. vii. 9; xix. 6, etc.; πλῆθος, Mk. iii. 7sq.; Lk. v. 6; Acts xiv. 1, ete.; 1. q. abundant, plenteous [A. V. often much], καρπός, Jn. xii. 24; xv. 5,8; θερισμός, (the harvest to be gathered), Mt. ix. 37; Lk. x. 2; γῆ, Mt. xiii. 5; Mk. iv. 5; χόρτος, Jn. vi. 10; οἶνος, 1 Tim. iii. 8; plur. πολλοὶ τελῶναι, Mt. ix. 10; Mk. ii. 15; πολλοὶ προφῆται, Mt. xiii. 17; Lk. x. 24; σοφοί, 1 Co. i. 26; πατέρες, 1 Co. iv. 15; δυνάμεις, Mt. vii. 22; xiii. 58, ete.; ὄχλοι, Mt. iv. 25; viii. 1; xii. 15 [but here L TWH om. Trbr. ὄχ.7; Lk. v. 15, ete.; δαιμόνια, Mk.i. 34; and in many otherexx.; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πολύς, “much,” plur. ‘‘many’’: P Petr I. 2905 (iii/B.c.) χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ εἰ ὑγιαίνεις, ‘‘much thanks to the gods if you are well,” P Ryl II. 2435 (ii/A.D.) τοῦτο οὐ μόνον ἡμεῖν yevapevov ἀλλὰ Kal πολλοῖς, ‘this has happened not to us only but to many ” (Edd.), and 16. 238* (A.p. 262) διὰ πολλὰς χρείας, “for various needs’ (Edd.). The word is very conimon in epistolary greetings (πολλὰ χαίρειν : exx. from B.C. 118 to ili/iv A.D. in Exler Eprstolography p. 27 f.) and in rhetorical prefaces (Sirach proem.), and consequently, as Cadbury suggests (in Jackson and Lake Beginnings of Christianity Part I. Vol. ii. p. 492 f.), πολλοί must not be pressed to mean “ἡ Ac 243, 10, For the adverbial πολλά, which ‘‘ lies between πολύ and πολλάκις : it is ‘much’ with the idea of plurality and repetition introduced’’ (Hort ad Jas 32), cf. P Heid 622 (iv/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 127) πολλὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλείων, πλεῖον (pleiōn, pleion) — greater.

πλείων,

πλέων, ὁ, ἡ, neuter πλεῖον, πλέον, πλεῖν, comparative of πολύς (on the forms see entry near the end), more, of number, size, extent, etc., οἱ δὲ μάχονται παυρότεροι πλεόνεσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐς πλείονας οἰκεῖν govern for the interest of the majority, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλέον᾽ ἔλπομαι λόγον Ὀδυσσέος ἢ πάθαν greater than.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν πλείω λόγον all further speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλείω τὸν πλοῦν.. ποιησάμενοι having made the voyage longer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ π. βίος a longer life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Time, longer, π. χρόνος [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πολύς

pleion

pleion pli'-on, or

pleon pleh'-on

comparative of 4183; more in quantity, number, or quality; also (in

plural) the major portion:--X above, + exceed, more excellent,

further, (very) great(-er), long(-er), (very) many, greater (more)

part, + yet but.

see GREEK for 4183

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλείων, εῖον

Adj

more, greater

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πολύς polys 416x

great in magnitude or quantity, much, large, Mt. 13:5; Jn. 3:23; 15:8; pl. many, Mt. 3:7; in time, long, Mt. 25:19; Mk. 6:35; Jn. 5:6; οἱ πολλοί, the many, the mass, Rom. 5:15; 12:5; 1 Cor. 10:33; τὸ πολύ, much, 2 Cor. 8:15; πολύ, as an adv., much, greatly, Mk. 12:27; Lk. 7:47; of…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλείων πλείων, πλέων, ονος, ὁ, ἡ, comp. of πολύς more, larger, both of number and size, Hom., etc.; τὸν πλείω λόγον all further speech, Soph.; πλείω τὸν πλοῦν the greater part of . . , Thuc.:—of Time, longer, πλείων χρόνος Hdt.; πλέων νύξ the greater part of night, Il.

with the Art., οἱ πλέονες the greater number, like οἱ πολλοί, the mass or crowd, Hom.; οἱ πλεῦνες Hdt., etc.; c. gen., τὰς πλεῦνας τῶν γυκαικῶν id. Hdt.:— the many, the people, opp. to the chief men, Thuc., etc.:— τὸ πλεῖον πολέμοιο the greater part of war, Hom.

pecul. usages of neut.:

as a Noun, more, πλεῦν ἔτι τούτου Hdt.; τὸ δὲ πλέον nay, what is more, Eur., Thuc.:— πλέον or τὸ πλέον τινός a higher degree of a thing, Soph.; τὸ πλ. τοῦ χρόνου Thuc.:— πλέον ἔχειν to…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASN-C — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASN-C Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter Degree: Comparative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%more
more33% · 15×greater16% · 7×many11% · 5×most7% · 3×further4% · 2×longer4% · 2×majority4% · 2×more than2% · 1×other renderings18% · 8×

45 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial35%object29%subject26%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 55 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
κατενεχθεὶςkatapherō having been overpowered G2702 Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To vote against or overcome, as in Acts 25:7 and 26:10, where it refers to casting a ballot or being overcome with sleep.
Amplified meaning
completely, thoroughly
Tyndale gloss
to vote against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καταφέρω (i.e., *kataphero*) is formed from the prefix κατα- and the root φέρω. It generally means to bring down or to bear down, and can refer to actions like casting a vote or being overcome by sleep. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Acts 20:9, where it describes being weighed down by drowsiness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατα-φέρω,

[in LXX for ירד hi., etc.;]

to bring down: αἰτιώματα, Ac 25:7; ψῆφον, to cast a ballot, Ac 26:10; pass., to be borne down: ὕπνῳ, ἀπὸ τ. ὕ., Ac 20:9.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατα-φέρω; | aor. κατήνεγκα; Pass., pres. καταφέρομαι; 1 aor. κατηνέχθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to bear down, bring down, cast down: ψῆφον, prop. to cast a pebble or caleulus se. into the urn, i. 6. to give one’s vote, /o approve, Acts xxvi. 10; αἰτιώματα κατά twos (see κατά, I. 2 b. [but the crit. edd. reject κατὰ xrA.]), Acts xxv. 7 LT Tr WH. Pass. to be borne down, to sink, (from the window to the pavement), ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου, from sleep (from the effect of his deep sleep [ef. B. 322 (277); W. 371 (348)]), Acts xx. 9°; metaph. to be weighed down by, overcome, carried away, καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ, sunk in a deep sleep, Acts xx. 9"; of a different sort [contra W. 431 (401) ] is the expression in prof. auth. καταφέρομαι cis ὕπνον. to sink into sleep, drop asleep, Joseph. antt. 2, 5,5; Hdian. 2,1, 3 [2]; 9,6 [5]; τοῖσιν ὕπνοισιν, Hipp. p. 1137 ο. [(Kiihn iii. p. 539)], and in the same sense…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταφέρω is used with reference to an assault in P Tebt I. 138 (late ii/B.C.) σπασάμενος ταύτην (sc. μάχαιραν) βουλόμενός pe ἀλογῆσαι κατήνεγκε [πλ]ηγαῖς τρισὶ καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ τὸν τράχηλον. For the meaning ‘bring down,” ‘carry down,” cf. P Giss I, 40% 19 (A.D. 215) οἵτινες κάλαμον πρ[ὸ]ς τὸ ὑποκαίειν τὰ βαλα[νεῖ]α Katadépovor, P Oxy X. 129219 (c. A.D, 30) ἐὰν δὲ χρέαν ἔχῃ (1. —ys) μάλιστία] EvAaplov δύο ἵνα μοι τὸν τροχὸν τῆς μηχανῆς κατενέγκῃς, “if you specially require two pieces of wood to bring down to me the wheel of the machine” (Edd.), and of ‘‘ bringing down”’ corn to Alexandria 74. 1260%8 (A.D. 286) κατενεγκῶ καὶ παραδώσω ὡς προκεῖται. Similarly of a dead body, 26. VII. 10688 (iii/A.D.) εἵνα δυνηθῶ Td σωμάτιν κατενενκῖν ἐν ᾿Αλεξάνδριαν : cf. OGZS 6748! ταφῆς ἀναφερομένης καὶ καταφερομένης, with Dittenberger’s note. The special usage in Ac 20° is well illustrated by Ps…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταφέρω (katapherō) — to vote against.

καταφέρω,

future κατοίσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 κατήνεγκα [LXX], infinitive - ενεγκεῖν [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Doric dialect κατέφειρα [Refs]:—bring down, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] will bring me down to the grave, Il.[same place]; βαρυπεσῆ καταφέρω ποδὸς ἀκμάν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of rivers, κ. χρυσίον, γῆν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially of cutting instruments, κ. τὴν σμινύην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὴν δίκελλαν, τὴν σφῦραν, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] let it fall upon him, [LXX+1st c.AD+]: absolutely, hew downwards, deal a blow, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

__b pull down, demolish, πύργους [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἥλους (warts) [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

__c pay down, discharge, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταφέρω

kataphero

from 2596 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear down, i.e.

(figuratively) overcome (with drowsiness); specially, to cast a

vote:--fall, give, sink down.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταφέρω

v.

I bring down, oppress

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταφέρω katapherō 4x

to bear down; to overpower, as sleep, Acts 20:9; καταφέρειν ψῆφον, to give a vote or verdict, Acts 26:10; to bring charges, Acts 25:7*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταφέρω fut. κατ-οίσω epic -οίσομαι to bring down, ἄχος με κατοίσεται Ἄϊδος εἴσω grief will bring me down to the grave, Il.; καταφέρω ποδὸς ἀκμάν I bring down my foot, Aesch.:—Pass. to be brought down by a river, of gold dust, Hdt.

of a storm, to drive ships to land, Thuc.

to pay down, Plut.

Pass. to be weighed down by sleep, NTest.

to carry home, Ar.:—Pass. to return, id. Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-APP-NSM — Verb · aorist · passive · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-APP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%overpowered
overpowered25% · 1×having been overpowered25% · 1×presenting25% · 1×i cast against25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
θυρίςa window-sill
Article the
πολύςmuch, many, often
ἐπί
αἰτίωμαa charge, accusation
βαρύςheavy, weighty,
αὐτός
τέDisj
καταφέρωhaving been overpowered
what comes after →
ὕπνοςsleep
βαθύςdeep, early, pro
ἀπό
Article the
ὅς
οὐNeg
ψῆφοςa pebble, a vote

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταφέρω · 4× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 8 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.337c. AD 75–95

Ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας Σαοῦλος ἄφωνος ὑπὸ λύπης ἐγένετο καὶ κατενεχθεὶς εἰς τοὔδαφος, εἴτε διὰ τὴν προσπεσοῦσαν ἐκ τῶν δεδηλωμένων ὀδύνην, εἴτε διὰ τὴν ἔνδειαν, οὐ γὰρ προσενήνεκτο τροφὴν τῇ παρελθούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ τε καὶ νυκτί, ῥᾳδίως ἔκειτο νέκυς ὥς τις.

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἀπὸapo by G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόby647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ὕπνουhupnos sleep G5258 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Sleep, as in a natural rest, like in Matthew 1:24, or a spiritual sleep, as in Romans 13:11.
Tyndale gloss
sleep
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὕπνος (*hupnos*) means 'sleep' and can also refer to 'slumber.' It appears in various contexts, including literal sleep in passages like Matthew 1:24 and Acts 20:9, and metaphorically in Romans 13:11 to denote spiritual slumber. The term has roots in ancient literature, where it is sometimes associated with death, described as a twin brother of Death in mythology.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὕπνος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX for שֵׁנָה, חֲלוֹם, etc. ;]

sleep: Mt 1:24, Lk 9:32, Jo 11:13, Ac 20:9; metaph., Ro 13:11.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὕπνος, -ov, ὁ, [i. 6. σύπνος, cf. Lat. sopnus, somnus; Curtius ὃ 3911, fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 713¥, sleep: prop., Mt. i. 24; Lk. ix. 32; Jn. xi.13; Acts xx.9; metaph. ἐξ ὕπνου ἐγερθῆναι (see ἐγείρω, 1), Ro. xiii. 11.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὕπνος. For the significance of visions granted in sleep (cf. Gen 2810. 1 Kingd 3°), we may note the important PSI IV. 435° (B.c. 258-7) (= Deissmann ZAZ?, p. 153), where a certain Zoilus writes to his friend and patron Apollonius— ἐμοὶ συμβέβηκεν θεραπεύοντι τὸν θεὸν Σάραπιν περὶ τῆς σῆς ὑγιείας... τὸν Σάραπίμ μοι χρημα[τίζει]ν πλε[ον Ἰά κ[ι]ς ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις, ὅπως ἂν διαπλεύσω πρὸς σὲ καὶ ἐμ[φανίσω σοι τοῦτ]οἵ ν] τὸ[ν] χρηματισμόν, ““1ι happened to me, while serving the god Sarapis for thy health . . ., that Sarapis warned me many a time in sleep that I should sail over to thee and signify to thee this answer’: cf. P Par 45° (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski?, p. 85, UPZ i. p. 329) ὁρῶ [[rov]} ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ τὸν δραπέδην Μενέδημον ἀντικείμενον ἡμῖν, P Lond 121410 (iii/A.pD.) (=I. p. 97) εἰδέτω por. . . ἐν τοῖς ὕπνοις, a spell for making a person talk in his sleep. From the inscrr. we may cite OG/S…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὕπνος (hupnos) — sleep.

ὕπνος, ὁ,

sleep, slumber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the sleep of death, κοιμήσατο χάλκεον ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+] — Special phrases:

I. of going to sleep, μιν ἐπήλυθε.. ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ὕπνῳ or ὕπνῳ πεσεῖν to fall a-sleep, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐχ ὕπνῳ γ᾽ ἐνδόντα (so Badham for εὕδοντά) μ᾽ ἐξεγείρετε [Refs]; also ὕπνῳ δεδμημένος, δαμείς, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νικώμενος, κρατηθεῖσ᾽, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. of waking from sleep, ἐγεῖραί τινα ἐξ ὕπνου [Refs 8th c.BC+]: of the sleeper, ἀνόρουσε, ἔγρετο, ἐξ ὕ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.3. with Preps., when the plural also is not uncommon, ἐν ὕπνῳ in sleep, in a dream, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς ὕ.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ὕπνον ὄντα…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὕπνος

hupnos

from an obsolete primary (perhaps akin to 5259 through the idea of

subsilience); sleep, i.e. (figuratively) spiritual torpor:--sleep.

see GREEK for 5259

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὕπνος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

sleep

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὕπνος hypnos 6x

sleep, Mt. 1:24; Lk. 9:32; Jn. 11:13; Acts 20:9; met. spiritual sleep, religious slumber, Rom. 13:11*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὕπνος ὕ^πνος, ὁ, sleep, slumber, Hom., etc.; χάλκεος ὕπνος, i. e. the sleep of death, Il.:— ὕπνος τινὰ ἐπέρχεται, ἐπορούει, ἱκάνει, αἱρεῖ, λαμβάνει Hom., etc.; εἰς ὕπνον πεσεῖν Soph.:— ἐν ὕπνῳ in sleep, Eur.;— καθ᾽ ὕπνον Soph.;— περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον about one's first sleep, Ar.

Sleep, twin-brother of Death, Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

slep: Represents many words in Hebrew and Greek. For the noun the most common are shenah, and hupnos; for the verb, yashen, shakhabh, and katheudo. The figurative uses for death (De 31:16, etc.) and sluggishness (Eph 5:14, etc.) are very obvious.

See DREAM.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ From God Ps 127:2

→ Of the sluggard (very lazy person) Pr 6:9,10

→ Of Jesus Mt 8:24; Mr 4:38; Lu 8:23

→ A symbol of death Job 14:12; Mt 9:24; Mr 5:39; Lu 8:52; Joh 11:11,12; 1Th 4:14

→ See DEATH

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%sleep
sleep100% · 6×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀπόκοίμησιςrepose, taking r
βαρέωI weight, load, burd
εἰμίI am, exist
καταφέρωI bring down, oppres
θυρίςa window-sill
ἐκ
σύ
ὕπνοςsleep
what comes after →
ποιέωI do, make
ὡςas, like as, how
διαγρηγορέωI awake out of sleep
δέbut, on the othe
λέγωI say, speak
βαθύςdeep, early, profoun
διαλέγομαιI converse, addr
πίπτωI fall, fall under
ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὕπνος · 6× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Romans
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.26c. AD 40

ἴδωμεν δὲ καὶ θάτερον, πῶς ὕπνῳ χρῆται ὁ νοῦς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.82c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὲ ταύτην τὴν ὄψιν διεγερθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὕπνου καὶ τεταραγμένος ὢν καὶ τί ποτʼ εἴη τὸ φάντασμα παρʼ ἐμαυτῷ σκοπῶν καταφέρομαι πάλιν εἰς ὕπνον καὶ δεύτερον ὄναρ ὁρῶ πολὺ τοῦ προτέρου θαυμασιώτερον, ὅ με καὶ μᾶλλον ἐκφοβεῖ καὶ ταράττει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD
CPR 23 2ArsinoitesAD 38–AD 41

ηι τῶι γράφοντι τόν Ἀρσινοΐτην παρὰ Μάρκου Ἀπωνίου Ὕπνου ἐπιτρόπου Μάρκου Ἀπωνίου Σατουρνίνου. τοῦ ὑπο … … ου δέομαι τὸ ἀντίγραφον

ἐπὶ οὖν σαθ … … τῶσθαι μὴ καί τι λόγον ποιουμένου … … ἐξ ὕπνου ἀναστὰς γενόμενος ἐνθάδε … … λ … περὶ τῶν ὀρφανῶν ὡς προεῖπον η ἐσχ

SB 1 4317AlexandriaAD 200

1 Πτολεμαῖος Διοδώρᾳ τῇ ἀδελφῇ χαίρειν. γινώσκειν σε θέλω, ὅτι ὕπνος οὐκ ἔρχεταί μοι διὰ νυκτὸς χάριν τῆς σῆς ἀπροαιρέσεως καὶ τῆς σῆς ἀπροθυμίας, ἣν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἔπεσενpiptō he fell G4098 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
91× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To fall or collapse can be literal, like falling down, or figurative, as in failing or stumbling, as seen in Matthew 10:29 and Revelation 8:10.
Amplified meaning
collapsed, tumbled down
Tyndale gloss
to collapse
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πίπτω is a Greek verb meaning 'to fall' and can refer to both literal and metaphorical falling. It encompasses various usages, including falling down, descending, and prostrating oneself in worship or supplication. The New Testament uses it in contexts like falling under judgment (James 5:12) and physical prostration (John 18:6). The lexicons show some variation in the nuances of its meanings, particularly in metaphorical applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πίπτω,

[in LXX chiefly for נפל;]

to fall;

of descent, to fall, fall down or from: seq. ἐπί, c. acc. loc., Mt 10:29, al.; εἰς, Mt 15:14, al.; ἐς μέσῳ, c. gen., Lk 8:7; παρὰ τ. ὁδόν, Mt 13:4, Mk 4:4, Lk 8:5; seq. ἀπό, Mt 15:27, al.; ἐκ, Mk 13:25, Lk 10:18, Re 8:10 9:1. Metaph.: ὁ ἥλιος, seq. ἐπί, Re…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πίπτω ; [impf. ἔπιπτον (Mk. xiv. 35 Τ' Trmrg. WH)]; fut. πεσοῦμαι; 2 aor. ἔπεσον and ace. to the Alex. form (received everywhere by Lchm. [exe. Lk. xxiii. 30], Tdf. [exe. Rev. vi. 16], Tr [exe. ibid.], WH; and also used by R Gin Rev. i. 17; v.14; vi. 18; xi. 165; xvii. 10) ἔπεσα (cf. [ WH. App. p.164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123]; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 724sq.; Béitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 277 sq., and see ἀπέρχομαι init.) ; pf. πέπτωκα, 2 pers. sing. -xes (Rev. ii. 5 T WH); see κοπιάω), 3 pers. plur. τκαν (Rev. xviii. 3, Led. ster. Tr txt. WH txt.; see γίνομαι) ; (fr. ΠΕΤΩ, as τίκτω fr. TEKQ [ef. Curtius, Etymol. § 214; Verbum, ii. p. 398]); fr. Hom. down; Sept. chiefly for 55); to fall; used 1. of descent from a higher place to a lower; a. prop. to fall (either from or upon, i.q. Lat. incido, decido): ἐπί w. ace. of place, Mt. x. 29; xiii. 5, [7], 8; xxi. 44 [T om. L WH Tr mrg. br. the vs.]; Mk. iv.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πίπτω, “fall down,” (1) of things—P Petr II. 13(3)? (B.c. 258-3) τὸ πρὸς νότον [τ]οῦ ὀχυρώματος τεῖχος μέρος μέν TL αὐτοῦ πεπτωκός ἐστιν, ‘the wall to the south of the prison, part of it has fallen” (Ed.) ; (2) of persons—P Oxy III. 475 (A.D. 182) ἔπεσεν kal ἐτελε[ύ]τησεν, “he fell and was killed,” the report of an accident. Tlérrwxev is common=“ paid” in documents of iii—1i B.C. : cf. P Lond 12002 (B.c. 192 or 168) (=III. p. 2) πέπτωκεν ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Διοσπόλει τῆι μεγαλῆι τράπεζαν, ‘paid into the bank at Diospolis Magna,” and P Fay 17} (B.c. 121), P Tebt I. ror! (B.c. 120) with the editors’ notes. See also P Hib I. 662 (B.c. 228) (= Witkowski*, p. 38) πίπτει [σοι] (‘‘tibi solvitur”) ἐν τοῖς κατὰ σὲ τόποις εἰκοστή, and Wilcken Os/y. i. p. 64. For a somewhat similar use of πέπτωκεν in dockets attached to contracts etc. cf. Ρ Tebt 11. 279! (B.c. 231) πέπτωκεν εἰς κιβωτὸν τὸ συνάλλαγμα ἐν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πίπτω (piptō) — to collapse.

πίπτω,

Aeolic dialect πίσσω, accusative to Grammars in Hilgard Exc. ex libris Herodiani p.28 (cf. Hdn.Gr.2.377 note); poetry subjunctive πίπτῃσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Epic dialect imperfect πῖπτον [Refs 8th c.BC+] (for the quantity of ι[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; Ionic dialect πίπτεσκον (συμ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future πεσοῦμαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect3rd.pers. plural πεσέονται [Refs 8th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular πεσέεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἔπεσον, infinitive πεσεῖν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular optative πεσοίης [Refs 1st c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect ἔπετον [Refs 7th c.BC+]; in later writers ἔπεσα, [LXX+5th c.BC+] (προς-): perfect πέπτωκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect participle πεπτεώς, εῶτος (the εω forming one syllable by synizesis), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also πεπτηώς, ηυῖα, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. participle πεπτώς [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πίπτω

pipto

peto pet'-o; (which occurs only as an alternate in certain

tenses);

probably akin to 4072 through the idea of alighting; to fall

(literally or figuratively):--fail, fall (down), light on.

see GREEK for 4072

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πίπτω

v.

I fall, fall under

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πίπτω to fall, fall down, Hom., etc.; πίπτειν ἐν κονίηισιν to fall in the dust, i. e. to fall and lie there, Il.; π. ἐν δεμνίοις Eur., etc.; or without ἐν, πεδίωι πίπτειν Il.; π. δεμνίοις Eur.; also, π. ἐπὶ χθονί Od.; ἐπὶ γᾶι Soph.; πρὸς πέδωι Eur.; with a Prep. of motion, π. ἐς πόντον Hes.; ἐπὶ γᾶν Aesch.; πρὸς οὖδας Eur.

Special usages:

πίπτειν ἔν τισι to fall violently upon, attack, ἐνὶ νήεσσι πέσωμεν Il.; πρὸς μῆλα καὶ ποίμνας Soph.

to throw oneself down, fall down, πρὸς βρέτη θεῶν Aesch.; ἀμφὶ γόνυ τινός Eur.

to fall in battle, πίπτε δὲ λαός Il., etc.; οἱ πεπτωκότες the fallen, Xen.; π. δορί by the spear, Eur.; —π. ὑπό τινος to fall by another's hand…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%fell
fell26% · 23×having fallen14% · 13×having fallen down4% · 4×will fall4% · 4×falling4% · 4×he fell3% · 3×i fell3% · 3×falls3% · 3×other renderings37% · 33×

90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 30 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%adverbial6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκεῖνοςὑπάρχωI am, exist, am
Article the
ψιχίονa crumbκαίand, even, also,ἀπό
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄλλοςother, another, παραχρῆμαinstantly, immed
αὐτός
ὁράωI see, look uponθρόνοςa throne, seat
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
Article the
πίπτωhe fell91×
what comes after →
ἐπί
Article theπρόσωπονthe face, counteἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
εἰς
Article the
Article the
πύργοςa tower, fortifiκλῆροςa lot, portionἀπείθειαwillful unbelief
παρά
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπίπτω · 91× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Luke Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Hebrews John Romans James
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.94c. AD 40

„Δὰν κρινεῖ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ λαόν, ὡσεὶ καὶ μία φυλὴ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ γενέσθω Δὰν ὄφις ἐφ’ ὁδοῦ, ἐγκαθήμενος ἐπὶ τρίβου, δάκνων πτέρναν ἵππου, καὶ πεσεῖται ὁ ἱππεὺς εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, τὴν σωτηρίαν περιμένων κυρίου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.219c. AD 75–95

ἔπειτα δὲ δείσας Ἀμαράμης, μὴ κατάφωρος γένηται καὶ πεσὼν ὑπὸ τὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ὀργὴν αὐτός τε ἀπόληται μετὰ τοῦ παιδίου καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν ἀφανίσειεν, ἔγνω μᾶλλον ἐπὶ τούτῳ ποιήσασθαι τὴν τοῦ παιδὸς σωτηρίαν καὶ πρόνοιαν ἢ τῷ λήσεσθαι…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.3c. AD 96

καὶ ἐλυπήθη Κάϊν λίαν καὶ συνέπεσεν τῷ προσώπῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD undated 2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD
P. Tor. 11Theben113 BC–112 BC

ὄντων ἱκανῶν καὶ κτηνῶν, ἔτι δὲ καὶ τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς καθʼ αὑτούς πατρικῆς χρείας πιπτόντων

ων αὐτοῖς δι … … οντων … … … τοῖς ἀφήλιξι π … πεσεῖν … … ἕτερος αὐτῶν ἀδελφὸς … … … εν χαλκώματά τινα … … τὸν

P.Oxy. 3 475OxyrhynchosAD 182

ἐτῶν η βουληθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ δώματος τῆς αὐτῆς οἰκίας παρακύψαι καὶ θεάσασθαι τὰς κροταλιστρίδας ἔπεσεν καὶ ἐτελεύτησεν. οὗ χάριν ἐπιδιδοὺς τὸ βιβλίδιον ἀξιῶ ἐὰν δόξῃ σοι ἀποτάξαι ἕνα τῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
τριστέγουtristegos third story G5152 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Third story refers to the top level of a building, like the one where Eutychus fell asleep in Acts 20:9.
Amplified meaning
the top level, the highest floor
Tyndale gloss
third story
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τρίστεγον (transliterated as tristegon) refers to a structure with three stories or roofs. It appears in the New Testament in Acts 20:9, where it denotes the third story of a building. The word is a compound of terms meaning 'three' and 'roof,' and various lexicons confirm its meaning without significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

**† τρίστεγος, -ον (τρεῖς, στέγη)

[in Sm.: Ge 6:17(16), Ez 42:6 * ;]

of three stories: τὸ τ. (sc. ὄκημα),

the third story, Ac 20:9 (Dion., FlJ, al.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τρίστεγος, -ov, (τρεῖς and στέγη). having three roofs or stories: Dion. Hal. 3, 68; [ Joseph. b. 1. 5, 5, 5]; τὸ τρίστεγον, the third story, Acts xx. 9 (Gen. vi. 16 Symm.); ἡ τριστέγη, Artem. oneir. 4, 40.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τρίστεγος, ‘of three stories’’ (Ac 20%). Τὸ the i/A.p. warrant for this word in P Oxy I. 99° (A.D. 55) μέρος ἥμισυ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ μητρικῆς οἰκία[ς] τριστέγου, ‘‘one half of ἃ three-storeyed house inherited from his mother ” (cf. 15), and 76. VIII. 1105® (A.D. 81-96) μερῶν τριῶν ἀπὸ μερῶν πέντε οἰκίας τριστέκου (/. τριστέγου), “three-fifths of a threestoreyed house’’ (Ed.): add 26. I. 7518 (a.p. 129) and from A.D. 212, P Lond 1164(e)? (=III. p. 160) οἰκίας τριστέγους This last papyrus shows us the corresponding forms δίστεγος and μονόστεγος.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τρίστεγος (tristegos) — third story.

τρί-στεγος, ον,

of or with three stories, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. τὸ τ. (i.e. οἴκημα) the third story, [NT]:—also τριστέγη, ἡ, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τρίστεγον

tristegon

neuter of a compound of 5140 and 4721 as noun; a third roof

(story):--third loft.

see GREEK for 5140

see GREEK for 4721

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τρίστεγος, ον

n.n.

having three stories, the third story

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τρίστεγον tristegon 1x

the third floor, third story, Acts 20:9*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sto-ri.

See COMMENTARY.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%third story
third story100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceτρίστεγον · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC 4th c. AD
PSI 8 908Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 42–AD 43

τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι μέρη δύο ἀπὸ μερῶν τριῶν πατρικῆς μου οἰκίας τριστέγου κοινῶν καὶ ἀδιαιρέτων ἐν Τεβτύνει· ὧν γείτονες τῆς ὅλης οἰκίαςνότου πρότερον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Ὀρσεῦτος

P.Mich. 5 332ArsinoitesAD 47–AD 48

ἡμέρας ἐπὶ τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον τέταρτον μέρος κοινὸν καὶ ἀδιαίρετον τῆς ὑπαρχούσης μοι οἰκίας τριστέγου καινῆς καὶ τῶν συγκυρόντων πάντων ἐν Τεβτύνει· ὧν γείτονες τῆς ὅλης οἰκίας νότου υἱῶν

P.Oxy. 1 99OxyrhynchosAD 55

καὶ ἄλλη γόνατι δεξιῶι, ἐν ἀγυιᾶι, μέρος ἥμισυ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ μητρικῆς οἰκίας τριστέγου καὶ τῶν εἰσόδων πασῶν καὶ ἐξόδων καὶ τῶν συγκυρόντων, τῶν ὄντων ἐπὶ τοῦ πρὸς

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
κάτωkatō down G2736 Adverb
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Under means downwards or below something. In the Bible, it is used in many places like Matthew 4:6 and Mark 14:66 to describe a physical location or direction.
Tyndale gloss
under
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κάτω (katō) is an adverb meaning 'down' or 'below.' It is derived from the preposition κατά and is used in contexts involving motion or location, often contrasting with ἄνω ('up'). In the New Testament, it appears in various verses to indicate physical or metaphorical positions beneath something else.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κάτω,

adv.

(< κατά),

[in LXX for מַטָּה, מִתַּחַת and cogn. forms;]

down, downwards (with verbs of motion), Mt 4:6, Lk 4:9, Jo 8:[6, 8], Ac 20:9.

below, beneath: Mk 14:66, Ac 2:19(LXX); ἕως κ. (Ez 1:27, al.), Mt 27:51, Mk 15:38; τὰ κ. (opp. to τ. ἄνω), Jo 8:23. Compar. κατωτέρω: ἀπὸ διετοῦς καὶ κ. (cf. I Ch 27:23), Mt 2:16.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κάτω (fr. κατά), adv., [fr. Hom. down], compar. κατωτέρω; [cf. W. 472 (440)]; 1. down, downwards: Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 9; Jn. viii. 6,8; Acts xx. 9. 2. below, beneath, [ οἴ. W. u. 5.7; a. of place: Mk. xiv. 66; Actsii.19; ἕως κάτω [A. V. to the bottom], Mt. xxvii. 51; Mk. xv. 38, (Ezek. i. 27; viii. 2); τὰ κάτω, the parts or regions that lie beneath (opp. to τὰ ἄνω, heaven), i. 6. the earth, Jn. viii. 23. b. of temporal succession: ἀπὸ διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω, from a child of two years and those that were of a lower age [cf. W. 370 (347) ], Mt. ii. 16; ἀπὸ εἰκοσαετοῦς καὶ κάτω. 1 Chr. xxvii. 23.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κάτω used of place ‘‘ down,” ‘‘ downwards,” is found 8 times in the NT, and may be illustrated by P Hal I. 1114 (B.c. 238) οὐλὴ τ]ραχήλωι κάτωι (for form, see Mayser Gr. p. 136), P Magd 1174 (B.c. 221) τῆς κάτω μερίδος, and P Tebt II. 41479 (il/A.D.) τὸ σφυρίδιν μετὰ τῶν ἐνόντων κάτω, ‘the little basket with its contents at the bottom” (Edd.). An ostracon receipt of ili/A.D. published by GH in Zegyf¢. Archaeol. Report 1904-05 p. 16, No. 12, runs—A{(tpas) ὃ (ἥμισυ) ὀκτασοῦφα καὶ τρισοῦφα ἄνω καὶ κάτω δικόντυλα (/.8vdAa) δωδεκάκυκλα.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κάτω (katō) — under.

κάτω,

adverb, (κατά):

I. with Verbs implying Motion, downwards, ἐπισκύνιον κ. ἕλκεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially of the nether world, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. βλέπειν, φέρεσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. διεχώρει αὐτοῖς they suffered from diarrhoea, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φάρμακον πῖσαι κ. give a purgative, [Refs]; κ. βοηθεῖν go down to help, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; for ἄνω καὶ κάτω, ἄνω κάτω, etc., see at {ἄνω} (B) [Refs 4th c.BC+]

I.2. downwards, in a chain of causes, ἐπὶ τὸ κ. ἰέναι [Refs 4th c.BC+]

I.3. with genitive, down from, πετρῶν ὦσαι κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+].

II. with Verbs implying Rest (so more frequently in Prose), beneath, below, opposed to ἄνω, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κάτω

Adv

down, below, lower, under, less

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κάτω katō 9x

(1) down, downwards, Mt. 4:6; Lk. 4:9; Jn. 8:6; Acts 20:9; (2) beneath, below, under, Mt. 27:51; Mk. 14:66; 15:38; Acts 2:19; ὁ, ἡ, τό, κάτω, what is below, earthly, Jn. 8:23*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κάτω κατά with verbs of Motion, down, downwards, Hom., Hdt., attic

with Verbs of Rest, beneath, below, underneath, opp. to ἄνω, Hes.: —esp. in the world below, Soph., Plat.

geographically below, southward, Hdt.; but also, on the coast, Thuc.

as a prep. c. gen. under, below, Trag.

comp. κατωτέρω, lower, further, downwards, Ar.; c. gen. lower than, below, Hdt.

Sup. κατωτάτω, at the lowest part, id. Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%down
down40% · 4×below30% · 3×bottom20% · 2×being stooped low10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%object9%predicate9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἕωςuntil, as far as
ἄνωθενfrom above, from
καίand, even, also, nam
διετήςtwo years old
σεαυτοῦ
βάλλωI cast, throw, r
ΠέτροςPeter
Article the
ἐντεῦθενhence, from this pla
σεαυτοῦ
κάτωdown11×
what comes after →
κύπτωI bend, stoop down
Article theγράφωI write
κατά
Article the
γράφωI write
γάρfor
εἰς
δύο
ἐν
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκάτω · 11× in the New Testament
John Matthew Acts Mark Luke
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 41c. AD 40

τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν ὅτι πρῶτον μέν ἐστι σπορὰ καὶ φυτεία, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν σπαρέντων καὶ φυτευθέντων αὔξησις, ἡ μὲν εἰς τὸ κάτω ῥίζας ἀποτείνουσα οἱονεὶ θεμελίους, ἡ δ’ εἰς τὸ ἄνω πρὸς ὕψος αἰρομένων καὶ στελεχουμένων;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.139c. AD 75–95

ἦσαν δʼ αὐτῇ πόδες τὰ μὲν ἐξ ἡμίσους ἕως τῶν κάτω τελέως ἐξηρτισμένοι οἷς Δωριεῖς προστιθέασι ταῖς κλίναις ἐμφερεῖς, τὸ δὲ πρὸς αὐτὴν ἀνατεῖνον τετράγωνοι τῇ ἐργασίᾳ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.5c. AD 100

Καὶ οὐ φάγῃ, φησίν, σμύραιναν οὐδὲ πολύποδα οὐδὲ σηπίαν: οὐ μή, φησίν, ὁμοιωθήσῃ κολλώμενος ἀνθρώποις τοιούτοις, οἵτινες εἰς τέλος εἰσὶν ἀσεβεῖς καὶ κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ, ὡς καὶ ταῦτα τὰ ἰχθύδια μόνα ἐπικατάρατα ἐν τῷ βυθῷ νήχεται, μὴ κολυμβῶντα…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P.Oxy. 71 4825OxyrhynchosAD 65–AD 69

τοῦ Θέωνος τῶν ἀπ’ Ὀξυρύγχων πόλεως. ἀπεγραψάμην τῷ ἐνεστῶτι ἔτει ἐπὶ κώμης Θώλθεως τῆς κάτω τοπαρχίας ἃ ἔχω θρέμματα καὶ πρώτης ἀπογραφῆς ἄρνας … οἷς προσεγέν

P.Oxy. 73 4957Sesphtha (Oxyrhynchites)AD 147

παρὰ Λεοντᾶτος χρηματίσαντος μητρὸς Τανούφιος ἀπὸ Σέσφθα τῆς κάτω τοπαρχίας. ἀπογράφομαι κατὰ τὰ κελευσθέντα ὑπὸ Οὐαλερίου Πρόκλου τοῦ ἡγεμονεύσαντος πρὸς τὴν τοῦ διελθόντος

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 89Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 153

Ἀνουβίωνι Ἰσιδώρου … … … αρούτιος μητρὸς Κλεοπάτρας ἐν τῇ κώμηι Φνεβιῇ κάτω, πεδίου Ἀπολλωνόπολιν καὶ Ναρμῦτιν, ἀπόντι διὰ Χαιρήμονος τοῦ Χαιρήμονος φροντιστοῦ παρὰ Ἁρφαήσεως Κρονίωνος τοῦ

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
ἤρθηairō was picked up G142 Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singular
101× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means to lift up or take away, used in John 8:59 to describe Jesus escaping, and in John 1:29 to describe Jesus taking away sin.
Amplified meaning
taken away, lifted
Tyndale gloss
to take up
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἴρω, transliterated as airō, is a Greek verb meaning to lift, raise, or take up. It encompasses a range of actions such as bearing or carrying something away, and it can also refer to the figurative act of raising one's voice or expiating sin. The New Testament uses this word in contexts like lifting a bed (Mark 2:9) and bearing the cross (Matthew 16:24).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἴρω,

[in LXX chiefly for נשׂא, also for לקח, etc.;]

to raise, take up, lift or draw up: Jo 8:59 11:41, Ac 27:17, al.

to bear, carry: Mt 4:6 16:24, al.

to bear or take away, carry off, remove: Mt 21:21, Jo 19:31, I Co 5:12 6:15 (v. Lft., Notes, 216), al.; of the taking away sin by Christ, Jo 1:29, I Jo 3:5. (Cf. ἀπ’, ἐξ-, ἐπ-, μετ-, συν-, ὑπερ-αίρω). For exx. from π., v. MM, VGT, s.v.)

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἴρω (contr. fr. poet. deipw); fut. ἀρῶ; 1 aor. ἦρα, inf. ἄραι, impv. dpov; pf. ἦρκα (Col. ii. 14); Pass., (pres. αἴρομαι]; pf. ἦρμαι (Jn. xx. 1); 1 aor. ἤρθην; (on the rejection of iota subser. in these tenses see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439 ;[W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. dpOjcopa; [fr. Hom. down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. NWI; to lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, Mk. xvi. 18; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b. to raise upwards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rey. x. 5; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, ery out, Lk. xvii. 13; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof. writ.) ; τὴν ψυχήν, to raise the mind, i. q. excite, affect strongly (with a sense of fear, hope, joy, grief, ete.) ; in Jn. x. 24 to hold the mind in suspense between doubt and hope, cf. Liicke [or Meyer] ad loc. ¢. to draw up: a fish, Mt. xvii. 27 (ἀνασπᾶν, Hab. i. 15)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἴρω. For αἴρω, “raise,” (ii/A.D.) ἄραι τὴν χεῖρα, and so 70. 607% 57. for αἴρειν χεῖρας may be specially noted, the Alexandrian inser. in Predsigke 1323 (ii/A.D.): θεῷ ὑψίστῳ καὶ πάντων ἐπόπτῃ Kal Ἡλίῳ καὶ Νεμέσεσι αἴρει ᾿Αρσεινόη ἄωρος τὰς χεῖρας. The inscr. is heathen, but has striking similarity to the Jewish prayer for vengeance on which Deissmann comments in ZAZ p. 423 ff. : is its thought partly due to Jewish suggestion? In P Fay 103% (iti/A.D.) payment is allotted to the bearers of a corpse—tois ἠρκάσι “lift up,”? as in Rev τοῦ, cf. Syd/ 807% One passage (4-601) αὐτόν : cf. P Grenf 11. 77° (iii/iv A.D.) ( = Se/ec- | tions, p. 120). In a magical formula of iii/A.D. instructions are given to take twenty-nine palm leaves, on whicn the names of the gods have been inscribed, and then —épe (= alpe) κατὰ δύο δύο, ‘‘Jift them up two by two,” P Oxy VI. 8861 ( = Selections, p. 111). A…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἴρω (airō) — to take up.

ἀείρω,

Epic dialect, Ionic dialect, and poetry; αἴρω (once in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. (except [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἀέρρω, [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἤειρον (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρον[Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect and Trag. ᾖρον: future ἀρῶ [ᾱ], contraction for ἀερῶ (which is not found), [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἤειρα (συν-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 7th c.BC+], Epic dialect ἄειρα[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect imperative ἀέρρατε[Refs 7th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἀέρσῃ[Refs]; participle ἀείρας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἦρα[Refs 5th c.BC+], 3rd.pers.plural ἤροσαν[LXX+3rd c.BC+], infinitive ἆραι[Refs 3rd c.BC+], participle ἄρας[Refs 5th c.BC+] in all moods]: perfect ἦρκα[Refs 4th c.BC+], (ἀπ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect ἤρκεσαν (ἀπ-) [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle ἀείρομαι (ἀπ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἴρομαι [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἴρω

airo

a primary root; to lift up; by implication, to take up or away;

figuratively, to raise (the voice), keep in suspense (the mind),

specially, to sail away (i.e. weigh anchor); by Hebraism (compare

5375) to expiate sin:--away with, bear (up), carry, lift up, loose,

make to doubt, put away, remove, take (away, up).

see HEBREW for 05375

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἴρω

v.

I raise, lift up

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἴρω airō 101x

to take up, lift, raise; bear, carry; take away, remove; destroy, kill

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἴρω epic and poet. ἀείρω q.v. distinguish ἀρῶ from ἀ_ρῶ, contr. of ἀερῶ. Act.

to take up, raise, lift up, Il., etc.; αἴρειν βῆμα to step, walk, Eur.; αἴρ. σημεῖον to hoist a signal, Xen.:—Pass. to mount up, ascend, id. Xen.

often of armies and ships, αἴρ. τὰς ναῦς to get the fleet under sail, Thuc.:—also intr. to get under way, start, set out, ἆραι τῶι στρατῶι id. Thuc.;—so in Mid. and Pass., Hdt., etc.

to bear, sustain, μόρον Aesch.; ἆθλον Soph.

to raise up, exalt, Aesch.:—of passion, to exalt, excite, ὑψοῦ αἴρειν θυμόν to grow excited, Soph.; αἴρειν θάρσος to pluck up courage, Eur., etc.: Pass., οὐκ ἤρθη νοῦν ἐς ἀτασθαλίην Simon.

to raise by words, to extol, exaggerate, Eur., Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-API-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singular
aorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-API-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%do take
do take9% · 9×do take up6% · 6×they took up6% · 6×having taken up5% · 5×will be taken away4% · 4×take4% · 4×away3% · 3×he should take up3% · 3×other renderings61% · 63×

103 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 55 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 101 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑαυτοῦχορτάζωI feed, satisfyἐγείρωI wake, arouse,
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,μαθητήςa learner, disciἐνώπιονbefore the face
λέγωI say, speak
οὗτοςπαρίστημιI bring, presentπαμπληθείall at once, all
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὅςδοκέωI think, seem, a
ἵναin order that, so th
ἀγγαρεύωI impress, sendῬοῦφοςRufusἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αἴρωwas picked up101×
what comes after →
Article the
κράβαττοςa bed, mattress,σταυρόςa crossπτῶμαa carcass, corps
ἀπό
αὐτόςσύArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
βάλλωI cast, throw, rἀνοίγωI openλέγωI say, speak
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ἀπόἐκ
σύ
μήNegArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἴρω · 101× in the New Testament
John Luke Mark Matthew Acts 1 Corinthians Revelation 1 John Colossians Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 132 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 10c. AD 40

τοῦ μὲν γὰρ γεγονότος ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τὸν πατέρα καὶ ποιητὴν αἱρεῖ λόγος·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.12c. AD 75–95

οἱ δὲ συνέντες ἰσχὺν αὐτῷ καὶ μέγεθος πραγμάτων τὴν ὄψιν προλέγουσαν καὶ κατʼ αὐτῶν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἐσομένην τῷ μὲν Ἰωσήπῳ τούτων οὐδὲν ὡς οὐ γνώριμον αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄναρ ὂν διεσάφησαν, ἀρὰς δʼ ἐποιήσαντο μηδὲν εἰς τέλος αὐτῷ παρελθεῖν ὧν ὑπενόουν καὶ πρὸς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.11c. AD 100

τύπος ἐστὶν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ θέμενος, ὅτι ὃς ἐὰν θέλῃ τὸ ἔριον ἆραι τὸ κόκκινον, δεῖ αὐτὸν πολλὰ παθεῖν διὰ τὸ εἶναι φοβερὰν τὴν ἄκανθαν, καὶ θλιβέντα κυριεῦσαι αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC

Ἐπιθυμήτῳ μηδὲ Τρυφωνίωνι ἂν μή σε ασ … α … …… ται τὸ καθέν” αἱρῶν ὅτι ὁ ἐπίτροπος ἔγνωκε ὅτι ἔχει τ … … … … … ἐνέχυρον, ἄν

P.Graux 2 9Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 33

σὺν Σεξτιλλίωι ἑκατοντάρχηι δραχμαὶ ξ παιδαρίωι δραχμαὶ η γείνεται τοῦ ιη ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ Αρη καὶ τοῦ ιθ ἔτους ἀργυρίου δραχμαὶ ω καὶ τιμῆς κλημάτων εἰς μοσχείαν δραχμαὶ ρκ

P.Mich. 5 237Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 43

ἀρουρῶν δ γ μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἀκῆν καὶ ἄλλον ἀρουρῶν … μίσθωσις Κρονίωνος πρὸς Ἡρᾶν ἀρουρῶν μίσθωσις Μαχάτου καὶ ἄλλου πρὸς Με … είφιον μυμ … μίσθωσις Ἀμάειτος πρὸς

sitting then a certain young man named Eutychus by the window, overpowered by sleep deep as is talking <the> Paul on longer, having been overpowered by the sleep he fell from the third story down and was picked up dead.
νεκρός.nekros dead. G3498 Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
128× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for dead, meaning something or someone is lifeless, either physically or spiritually, as seen in Matthew 28:4 and Revelation 1:18.
Amplified meaning
lifeless, without breath
Tyndale gloss
dead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νεκρός is an adjective meaning 'dead,' derived from a root associated with corpses. It describes both literal death and metaphorical states, such as spiritual death or being inactive. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including references to the dead (e.g., Mt 11:5) and spiritual conditions (e.g., Ro 6:13). The word can also function as a noun, referring to the dead as a group.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νεκρός, -ά, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for מֵת;]

dead,

as adj.,

prop.: Ac 5:10 20:9, Ja 2:26, Re 1:18, al.; ὡσεὶ ν., Mt 28:4, Mk 9:26, Re 1:17; of that which is subject to death, Ro 8:10.

Metaph.,

of persons: Lk 15:24, 32; of those immersed in worldly cares, Mt 8:22, Lk 9:60; of spiritual death, Jo 5:25, Ro 6:13,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νεκρός, -d, -dv, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex [fr. ἃ r. signifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius § 93; Fick i. p. , 123; Vanitek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for n>; dead, » i.e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last, lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v. 10; xx. 9; xxviii. 6; Heb. xi. 35; Rev.i. 17; ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ἐπί, B. 2 ἃ. €. p. 233

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νεκρός (nekros) — dead.

νεκρός, ὁ

(of a woman, [Refs 4th c.BC+], corpse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as substantive, in early writers always of mankind, νεκροὺς συλήσετε τεθνηῶτας [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of those killed in battle, τοὺς ν. ὑποσπόνδους ἀνείλοντο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, of a fish, ν. ἰχθύος [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. dying person, μυχθισμὸς νεκρῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. metaphorically, ὁ υἱός μου ν. ἦν καὶ ἀνέζησε [NT]

4. in plural, the dead, as dwellers in the nether world, κλυτὰ ἔθνεα νεκρῶν [NT+8th c.BC+]

II. as adjective νεκρός, ά, όν, dead, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ν. σώματα Mitteis [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but also τὰ τῶν ν. σώματα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: comparative -ότερος[Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νεκρός

nekros

from an apparently primary nekus (a corpse); dead (literally or

figuratively; also as noun):--dead.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νεκρός, ά, όν

Adj

dead, a corpse

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νεκρός nekros 128x

dead, without life, Mt. 11:5; 22:31; met. νεκρός τινι, dead to a thing, no longer devoted to, or under the influence of a thing, Rom. 6:11; dead in respect of fruitlessness, Jas. 2:17, 20, 26; morally or spiritually dead, Rom. 6:13; Eph. 5:14; dead in alienation from God, Eph. 2:1, 5; Col. 2:13; subject to death, mortal, Rom. 8:10; causing death and misery, fatal, having a destructive power, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νεκρός νεκρός, οῦ, ὁ, = νέκυς a dead body, corpse, Hom., etc.: —in pl. the dead, as dwellers in the nether world, Od.; τοὺς ἑαυτῶν ν. their own dead, of those killed in battle, Thuc.

as adj., νεκρός, ή, όν, dead, Pind.:— comp. -ότερος Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ded (muth; nekros): Used in several senses:

(1) as a substantive, denoting the body deprived of life, as when Abraham speaks of burying his dead (Ge 23);

(2) as a collective noun including all those that have passed away from life (as Re 20:12). In several passages dead in this sense is used in contrast to the quick or living (as Nu 16:48). This collective mode of expression is used when resurrection is described as "rising from the dead";

(3) as an adjective, coupled with body, carcass or man, as De 14:8 the King James Version;

(4) most frequently it is used as a complement of the verb "to be," referring to the condition of being deceased or the period of death, e. g. 2Sa…

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 34 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.108c. AD 40

„Ζῶμεν τὸν ἐκείνων θάνατον, τεθνήκαμεν δὲ τὸν ἐκείνων βίον," ὡς νῦν μέν, ὅτε ζῶμεν, τεθνηκυίας τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ ὡς ἂν ἐν σήματι τῷ σώματι ἐντετυμβευμένης, εἰ δὲ ἀποθάνοιμεν, τῆς ψυχῆς ζώσης τὸν ἴδιον βίον καὶ ἀπηλλαγμένης κακοῦ καὶ νεκροῦ συνδέτου τοῦ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.55c. AD 75–95

ἔνθεν ὁ Κάις παροξυνθεὶς ἐπὶ τῷ προτετιμῆσθαι τὸν Ἄβελον ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ κτείνει τὸν ἀδελφὸν καὶ τὸν νεκρὸν αὐτοῦ ποιήσας ἀφανῆ λήσειν ὑπέλαβεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.6c. AD 100

οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Mich. 5 228Areos Kome (Arsinoites)AD 47

εἰς τὰ παρατυχόντα μέρη τοῦ σώματος ἐγκύῳ οὔσῃ ὥστε παρʼ αὐτῇ ἐκτέτρωται τὸ βρέφος νεκρὸν ὥστε αὐτὴν κατακλινῆ εἶναι καὶ κινδυνεύειν τοῦ ζῆν. διὸ ἀξιῶ γράψαι τοῖς τῆς Ὠξυρύνχων

P.Fouad 1 75ArsinoitesAD 64

τετελευτηκέναι καὶ ἤδη εὐτυχῆσθαιτῷ Φαῶφι τῆι ἐνάτηι ἀπʼ ὠμοτοκετοῦ· ἔτεκεν γὰρ ὀκτὼ μηνῶν παιδίον νεκρὸν καὶ τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἐπέζωσε καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα τετελεύτηκεν καὶ περιεστάλη ὑφʼ ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ

PSI 8 967AD 1–AD 200

δυνασθῶ ἀναπλεῦσαι βουλεύομαι αὐτὴν ὥδε θάψαι πρόσδεξαι αὐτὴν ἐν τῷ ἄρτι ἐρχομένῳ πλοίῳ τῶν νεκρῶν πέμψον μοι ταχύτερον ἵνα ἰσχύσω ἀναβῆναι μετὰ τὴν ἑορτήν. ταῦτα λέγει Ἀφροδισία τῷ πατρὶ

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate